Installation and Maintenance Guide

BCM50 3.0 Business Communications Manager

Document Status: Standard Document Number: NN40020-302 Document Version: 02.02 Date: February 2009

Copyright 20062009 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.

Trademarks
Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks. Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

SOFTWARE LICENSE
NORTEL NETWORKS INC. (NORTEL NETWORKS) TELECOMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
THIS LEGAL DOCUMENT IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT ("License") BETWEEN YOU, THE END-USER ("CUSTOMER") AND NORTEL NETWORKS. PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU, THE CUSTOMER, ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE AND THE ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO NORTEL NETWORKS THROUGH A NORTEL NETWORKS AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF YOUR ACQUISITION OF THE SOFTWARE FOR A REFUND.
Subject to the terms hereinafter set forth, NORTEL NETWORKS grants to CUSTOMER and/or its representatives, with a "need to know," a personal, non-exclusive license (1) to use the licensed software, proprietary to NORTEL NETWORKS or its suppliers and (2) to use the associated documentation. CUSTOMER is granted no title or ownership rights, in or to the licensed software, in whole or in part, and CUSTOMER acknowledges that title to and all copyrights, patents, trade secrets and/or any other intellectual property rights to and in all such licensed software and associated documentation are and shall remain the property of NORTEL NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers. The right to use licensed software may be restricted by a measure of usage of applications based upon number of lines, number of ports, number of terminal numbers assigned, number of users, or some similar measure. Expansion beyond the specified usage level may require payment of an incremental charge or another license fee. NORTEL NETWORKS considers the licensed software to contain "trade secrets" of NORTEL NETWORKS and/or its suppliers. Such "trade secrets" include, without limitation thereto, the specific design, structure and logic of individual licensed software programs, their interactions with other portions of licensed software, both internal and external, and the programming techniques employed therein. In order to maintain the "trade secret" status of the information contained within the licensed software, the licensed software is being delivered to CUSTOMER in object code form only. NORTEL NETWORKS or any of its suppliers holding any intellectual property rights in any licensed software, and/or any third party owning any intellectual property rights in software from which the licensed software was derived, are intended third party beneficiaries of the License. All grants of rights to use intellectual property intended to be accomplished by this License are explicitly stated. No other grants of such rights shall be inferred or shall arise by implication. CUSTOMER warrants to NORTEL NETWORKS that CUSTOMER is not purchasing the rights granted by this License in anticipation of reselling those rights. CUSTOMER shall: Hold the licensed software in confidence for the benefit of NORTEL NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers using no less a degree of care than it uses to protect its own most confidential and valuable information; and Keep a current record of the location of each copy of licensed software made by it; and Install and use each copy of licensed software only on a single CPU at a time (for this purpose, single CPU shall include systems with redundant processing units); and Make full or partial copies of any documentation or other similar printed or machine-readable matter provided with licensed software unless the same has been supplied in a form by NORTEL NETWORKS intended for periodic reproduction of partial copies; or Export or re-export licensed software and/or associated documentation by downloading or otherwise from the fifty states of the United States and the District of Columbia. Affix to each copy of licensed software made by it, in the same form and location, a reproduction of the copyright notices, trademarks, and all other proprietary legends and/or logos of NORTEL NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers, appearing on the original copy of such licensed software delivered to CUSTOMER; and retain the same without alteration on all original copies; and Issue instructions to each of its authorized employees, agents and/or representatives to whom licensed software is disclosed, advising them of the confidential nature of such licensed software and to provide them with a summary of the requirements of this License; and Return the licensed software and all copies through an Authorized Distributor to NORTEL NETWORKS at such time as the CUSTOMER chooses to permanently cease using it.

CUSTOMER shall not: Use licensed software (i) for any purpose other than CUSTOMERs own internal business purposes and (ii) other than as provided by this License; or Allow anyone other than CUSTOMERs employees, agents and/or representatives with a "need to know" to have physical access to licensed software; or Make any copies of licensed software except such limited number of object code copies in machine readable form only, as may be reasonably necessary for execution or archival purposes only; or Make any modifications, enhancements, adaptations, or translations to or of licensed software, except as may result from those CUSTOMER interactions with the licensed software associated with normal use and explained in the associated documentation; or Attempt to reverse engineer, disassemble, reverse translate, decompile, or in any other manner decode licensed software, in order to derive the source code form or for any other reason; or

PLEASE REFER TO THE NEXT PAGE

Installation and Maintenance Guide

4
Except for Java Product (as defined herein below), CUSTOMER may assign collectively its rights under this License to any subsequent owner of the associated hardware, but not otherwise, subject to the payment of the then current license fee for new users, if any. No such assignment shall be valid until CUSOMTER (1) has delegated all of its obligations under this License to the assignee; and (2) has obtained from the assignee an unconditional written assumption of all such obligations; and (3) has provided NORTEL NETWORKS a copy of such assignment, delegation and assumption; and (4) has transferred physical possession of all licensed software and all associated documentation to the assignee and destroyed all archival copies. Except as provided, neither this License nor any rights acquired by CUSTOMER through this License are assignable. Any attempted assignment of rights and/or transfer of licensed software not specifically allowed shall be void and conclusively presumed a material breach of this License. If NORTEL NETWORKS (i) claims a material breach of this License, and (ii) provides written notice of such claimed material breach to CUSTOMER and (iii) observes that such claimed material breach remains uncorrected and/or unmitigated more than thirty (30) days following CUSTOMERs receipt of written notice specifying in reasonable detail the nature of the claimed material breach, then CUSTOMER acknowledges that this License may be immediately terminated by NORTEL NETWORKS and CUSTOMER further acknowledges that any such termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights and remedies that NORTEL NETWORKS may have at law or in equity. EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTIES FOR ANY ITEM OF LICENSED SOFTWARE, IF ANY, WILL BE SOLELY THOSE GRANTED DIRECTLY TO CUSTOMER BY DISTRIBUTOR. OTHER THAN AS SET FORTH THEREIN, THIS LICENSE DOES NOT CONFER ANY WARRANTY TO CUSTOMER FROM OR BY NORTEL NETWORKS. THE LICENSED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NORTEL NETWORKS "AS IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND OR NATURE, WRITTEN OR ORAL, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING (WITHOUT LIMITATION) THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS LIMITATION OF WARRNATIES WAS A MATERIAL FACTOR IN THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE LICENSE FEE CHARGED FOR EACH SPECIFIC ITEM OF SOFTWARE LICENSED. IN NO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS AND/OR NORTEL NETWORKS SUPPLIERS AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO OR THROUGH CUSTOMER FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR BUSINESS INFORMATION, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR OTHER ECONOMIC DAMAGE, AND FURTHER INCLUDING INJURY TO PROPERTY, AS A RESULT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY OR OTHER TERM OF THIS LICENSE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER NORTEL NETWORKS AND/OR NORTEL NETWORKS SUPPLIERS WERE ADVISED, HAD OTHER REASON TO KNOW, OR IN FACT KNEW OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF. Restricted Rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Right in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR 52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable. The rights and obligations arising under this License shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Tennessee. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this License or portion thereof to be unenforceable, that provision of the License shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of the parties and the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect. This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the licensed software and the associated documentation, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of NORTEL NETWORKS.

Open source copyright (ppp-2.4)

This product contains software that is distributed under open source agreements. This product contains ppp-2.4, a package which implements the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to provide Internet connections over serial lines. This open source package is freely downloadable at: ftp:// ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/. The following copyright notices apply to this software: Copyright (C) 2002 Roaring Penguin Software Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation, the name of Roaring Penguin Software Inc. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission, and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Roaring Penguin Software Inc.. Roaring Penguin Software Inc. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Copyright (C) <lf@elemental.net> 1995,1996,1997,1998 Lars Fenneberg

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation, the name of Lars Fenneberg not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission, and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Lars Fenneberg. Lars Fenneberg makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

NN40020-302

5
Copyright 1992 Livingston Enterprises, Inc. Livingston Enterprises, Inc. 6920 Koll Center Parkway Pleasanton, CA 94566 Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation, the name of Livingston Enterprises, Inc. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission, and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Livingston Enterprises, Inc. Livingston Enterprises, Inc. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. [C] The Regents of the University of Michigan and Merit Network, Inc. 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995 All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and derivative works or modified versions thereof, and that both the copyright notice and this permission and disclaimer notice appear in supporting documentation. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN AND MERIT NETWORK, INC. DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET LICENSEE'S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. The Regents of the University of Michigan and Merit Network, Inc. shall not be liable for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages with respect to any claim by Licensee or any third party arising from use of the software.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

NN40020-302

Task List
Installing the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
To install the rack-mount shelf in an equipment rack ....................................................83 To install the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf ........................................................84 To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit ..............................................................85 To install the patch panel...............................................................................................85 To install the BCM50 wall-mount bracket ......................................................................86 To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket ....................................................88 To install the WFC .........................................................................................................90 To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf ............................................................91 To install the power supply on the rack-mount shelf .....................................................92 To install the power supply on the desktop ...................................................................93 To install a power supply using the power supply mounting enclosure .........................93 To install a power supply using the single power supply mounting bracket ..................93

Installing an expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

To set G4x16 or G8x16 dip switches.............................................................................98 To set GASM dip switches ............................................................................................98 To set GATM dip switches.............................................................................................99 To install an MBM ........................................................................................................100

Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

To connect an expansion unit .....................................................................................105 To connect a power supply using a UPS.....................................................................107 To connect a power supply without a UPS ..................................................................107 To connect the lines and extensions ...........................................................................110 To connect telephone lines to DTM, BRIM, or 4x16 MBMs.........................................111 To connect analog telephone lines to the GATM4/GATM8 or G4x16/G8x16..............112 To connect extensions to DSM16, DSM32, ASM8, 4x16, G4x16, or G8x16 MBMs ...113 To install an auxiliary ringer .........................................................................................114 To install an external paging system ...........................................................................114 To connect the music source using the music source jack .........................................116 To connect the music source using the RJ-21 telephony connector ...........................116 To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) .............................................117 To connect the cables to the patch panel (optional) ....................................................117

Installing telephones and peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

To install the emergency telephone.............................................................................120

Installing the analog terminal adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

To connect the ATA2...................................................................................................123 To mount the ATA2 on a wall ......................................................................................123 To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device................................125 To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO................................125

Configuring the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Installation and Maintenance Guide

Task List

Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

To enter the keycodes .................................................................................................132 To configure the IP address ........................................................................................133 To configure the modem..............................................................................................133 To select the region .....................................................................................................134 To select the telephony startup template and start DN ...............................................134 To initialize voice mail..................................................................................................134 To create Telset user accounts ...................................................................................134

Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

To access the BCM50 Web page ................................................................................138 To download and install Element Manager .................................................................138 To connect to the BCM50 system using Element Manager ........................................139 To enter a keycode......................................................................................................139 To configure the LAN IP address ................................................................................140 To configure the modem..............................................................................................140 To configure the startup template for telephony services ...........................................140 To initialize voice mail..................................................................................................141 To enter a name for your system.................................................................................141 To configure the date and time settings ......................................................................142 To configure DHCP server settings ............................................................................142 To configure IP Phones ...............................................................................................144 To configure SNMP settings ........................................................................................145 To configure SNMP community strings .......................................................................145 To configure the SNMP manager list...........................................................................146 To create user accounts ..............................................................................................146 To configure SRG ........................................................................................................147

Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

To download the Startup Profile template ...................................................................151 To customize a Startup Profile for your system ..........................................................151 To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM50 system ...........................................152

Completing the initial installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

To configure the MBM(s) .............................................................................................156

Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

To connect the BCM50 system to the LAN .................................................................161 To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN ....................................162 To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN ....................................162

Testing basic BCM50 functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

To test the main unit ....................................................................................................165 To troubleshoot the main unit ......................................................................................166 To test the expansion unit ...........................................................................................166 To troubleshoot the expansion unit .............................................................................166 To test the MBM ..........................................................................................................167 To test a station MBM..................................................................................................167 To test a trunk MBM ....................................................................................................167 To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager .............................168 To determine why the ATA2 does not function............................................................168 To determine why there is no dial tone at the ATA2....................................................168

NN40020-302

Task List

To check the ATA2 wiring............................................................................................169 To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset.......................................................................170

Replacing the BCM50 system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

To shut down the system.............................................................................................174 To return the system to operation................................................................................174

Replacing a power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

To remove the power supply .......................................................................................176 To connect the new power supply ...............................................................................177

Replacing a main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

To disconnect the cables.............................................................................................180 To remove a rack-mounted main unit ..........................................................................181 To remove a wall-mounted main unit ..........................................................................181 To remove a desktop mounted main unit ....................................................................181 To connect the cables .................................................................................................182

Replacing a media bay module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

To remove the MBM ....................................................................................................184 To insert the new MBM................................................................................................185

Replacing an expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

To disconnect the expansion unit cables.....................................................................188 To remove a rack-mounted expansion unit .................................................................189 To remove a wall-mounted expansion unit ..................................................................189 To remove a desktop-mounted expansion unit ...........................................................189 To remove the MBM ....................................................................................................190 To connect the cables .................................................................................................191

Replacing an internal component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

To open the main unit case .........................................................................................195 To remove the hard disk..............................................................................................197 To remove the fan .......................................................................................................198 To remove the router card ...........................................................................................199 To insert the new hard disk .........................................................................................200 To insert the new fan ...................................................................................................202 To insert the new router card.......................................................................................203 To close the main unit case .........................................................................................204

RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 BRI wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 LAN ports wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 WAN ports wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Expansion ports wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 DTM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Installation and Maintenance Guide

10

Task List

BRIM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ADID wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 GATM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 4x16 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Market profile attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

NN40020-302

11

Contents
New in this release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Other changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
North American regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Canadian Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 EMI/EMC (FCC Part 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Important safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Enhanced 911 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Radio-frequency interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Telecommunication registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 International regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Additional safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ITU standardization compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Chapter 1 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Symbols and text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Main units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Media bay modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 BCM50 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Rack-mount shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Patch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Wall-mount bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Installation and Maintenance Guide

12

Contents

Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Wiring field card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 BCM50 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Power supply adapter cord (international users) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Uninterruptable power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 RJ-21 telephony connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Router card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Field-replaceable units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

System status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 LAN port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 ADSL router LEDs (BCM50a and BCM50ba only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Ethernet router LEDs (BCM50e and BCM50be only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 BRI port LEDs on main unit (BRI series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 DTM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 BRIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

BCM50 and BCM50b main units (no integrated router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 If an external DHCP server is not present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 If an external DHCP server is present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units (with integrated router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Site telephony wiring requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Digital loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Analog loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 System equipment, supplies, and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

NN40020-302

Contents

13

Basic hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Other hardware and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Unpacking the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Installing the patch panel (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Installing the wiring field card (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Installing the BCM50 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Next step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Unpacking the expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Verifying the media bay module switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Installing the expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Next step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Connecting the expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Connecting the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Connecting the lines and extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Wiring warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector . . . . . . . . . 110 Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Connecting extensions to the expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Connecting the auxiliary equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Connecting an auxiliary ringer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Connecting an external paging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Connecting an external music source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Next step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

System telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Analog terminal adapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Installation and Maintenance Guide

14

Contents

Installing an emergency telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Installing IP phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Analog data device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Installing the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Connecting the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Mounting the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Test insertion loss measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Configuring the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Initial parameters overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Startup parameters overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Configuring the initial parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Next step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Accessing the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Configuring the initial parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Configuring the startup parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Next step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Startup Profile requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Configuring basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Next step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Configuring the media bay module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Configuring modem settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Checking for software updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

NN40020-302

Contents

15

Configuring voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Customizing security policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Performing a backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Next step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Reset to factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Reset levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Activate the reset feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Preparing the system for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Restarting the system after maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Preparing the system for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Removing the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Connect the new power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Preparing the system for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Removing the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Installing the new main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Disconnecting the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Removing the expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Removing the MBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Installing the new expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Installation and Maintenance Guide

16

Contents

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Preparing the system for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Removing the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Opening the main unit case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Removing an internal component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Inserting the new component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Closing the main unit case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Installing the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Connecting the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Appendix B BRI wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Appendix F DTM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Appendix G BRIM wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Appendix H ADID wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Appendix I GATM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Appendix L

NN40020-302

Contents

17

DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Appendix M ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Appendix N Market profile attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Interface availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Analog interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Digital interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Tones and cadences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Core parameters for market profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Analog Trunk parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 GASM8 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 GASI parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 ATA2 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 ATA2 DR6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 ATA2 DR7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 ISDN line services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Analog and digital trunk types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Installation and Maintenance Guide

18

Contents

NN40020-302

New in this release

19

New in this release

The following sections detail whats new in Device Configuration Guide Standard 02.04 Business Communications Manager for release 3.0. Features on page 19 Other changes on page 19

Features
This release contains no new features.

Other changes
Revision history
February 2009
Standard 02.02. This document is up-issued to update technical information in the chapter Market profile attributes.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

20

New in this release

NN40020-302

21

Regulatory information
For regulatory information about the BCM50 system: North American regulatory information International regulatory information on page 26

North American regulatory information

This Class A device complies with Part 68 and Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES-003 Class A Canadian EMI requirements. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. Do not attempt to repair this equipment. If you experience trouble, write for warranty and repair information:

USA Nortel 640 Massman Drive Nashville, TN, USA 37210

Canada Nortel Repair Service Centre 30 30 Norelco Drive Weston Ontario, Canada M9L 2X6

For warranty and repair service outside the USA or Canada, please contact your distributor.

Canadian Notice
The Industry Canada designation identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

22

Regulatory information

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notice

FCC registration number: This telephone equipment complies with Part 68, Rules and Regulations, of the FCC for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network. Your connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network must comply with these FCC rules: Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the preceding conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. See installation instructions for details. Use only an FCC Part 68-compliant Universal Service Order Code (USOC) network interface jack, as specified in the installation instructions, to connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network. If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of the product may be required. But if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC, if you believe it is necessary.

Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)

The REN provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5.

EMI/EMC (FCC Part 15)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NN40020-302

Regulatory information

23

Important safety instructions

The following safety instructions cover the installation and use of the Product. Read carefully and retain for future reference.

Installation
Warning: To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage observe the following precautions when installing telephone equipment: Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. Use
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read and understand all instructions. Follow the instructions marked on the product. Unplug this product (or host equipment) from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

10 To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product, but send it to a qualified service person when some service or repair work is required.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

24

Regulatory information

11 Unplug this product (or host equipment) from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a b When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed. If the product has been exposed to rain, water or liquid has been spilled on the product, disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates; but do not open up the product. If the product housing has been damaged. If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance. Caution: To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords, plugs, jacks, and the telephone, do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures.

c d

Warning: Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a wall or baseboard jack. Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible damage to the handset. 12 Save these instructions.

Use of a music source

In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system. Nortel hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.

Safety
Business Communications Manager 50 (BCM50) equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22.2 No.60950 and UL 60950 Edition 3. Danger: Risk of shock. Read and follow installation instructions carefully. Ensure the BCM50 is not powered and that all telephone/data cables are removed prior to opening the BCM50 unit in the field. If installation of additional hardware and /or servicing is required, disconnect all telephone cable connections prior to unplugging the BCM50 modules. Ensure the BCM50 is connected to a wall outlet with a third-wire protective earth connection prior to connecting any telecommunications cables to the BCM50 main unit or expansion units.

NN40020-302

Regulatory information

25

Caution: Only qualified persons should service the system. The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons. Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the BCM50 system must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire ground. Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines. These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground through the power cord. Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit. Specifically, operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections (central office lines) removed first.

Enhanced 911 configuration

Warning: Local, state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer Premises Equipment vary. Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations.

Radio-frequency interference
Warning: Equipment generates RF energy. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES.003, CLASS A Canadian EMI Requirements. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his or her own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

Telecommunication registration
BCM50 equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS-03 and US Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada 332D-5980A and FCC US: AB6KF15B20705 (key system), US: AB6MF15B20706 (hybrid system), and US: AB6PF15B23740 (PBX system). Connection of the BCM50 telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunications company. This type of customer-provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

26

Regulatory information

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the preceding conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician.

International regulatory information

The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following: This device conforms to Directive 1999/5/EC on Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European Parliament And Of The Council.

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Hereby, Nortel declares that BCM50 units, with Model No. NT9T61XX, NT9T62XX, NT9T64XX, and NT9T65XX, are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 (Class A) and EN 55024. These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment.

Warning: This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. The preceding warning is inserted for regulatory reasons. If any customer believes that they have an interference problem, either because their Nortel product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference, they should contact their distributor immediately. The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and, if necessary, will have full support from Nortel.

NN40020-302

Regulatory information

27

Safety
Warning: Only qualified service personnel may install this equipment. The instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only.

Warning: Risk of shock. Ensure the BCM50 is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the BCM50. Read and follow installation instructions carefully

Warning: Only qualified persons should service the system. The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons. Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the BCM50 system must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire Earth. Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines. These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth through the power cord. Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit. Specifically, operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections (exchange lines) removed first.

Additional safety information

The following interfaces (TNV) can be connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network in accordance with Nortel and the local carriers installation requirements: BCM50, CSC GATi Ports integrated (Loop Start) BCM50, CSC ADSL Port option Expansion Unit, Digital Trunk Module (T1/E1/ISDN) Expansion Unit, Global Analog Trunk Module 4 and 8 Port (Loop Start) Expansion Unit, CTM4/8 (Loop Start) Expansion Unit, 4x16 (Loop Start) Expansion Unit, G4x16, G8x16 (Loop Start)

Installation and Maintenance Guide

28

Regulatory information

Expansion Unit, BRIM (ST configuration) Expansion Unit, ADID4/ADID8 (Direct Inward Dial) Expansion Unit R2MFC

The following interfaces are designated as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) and cannot be connected to unprotected plant wiring. BCM50, CSC Page Port BCM50, CSC Auxiliary Ringer Port BCM50, CSC Music On-Hold Port. BCM50, CSC Relay Port BCM50, CSC USB Port BCM50, CSC Ethernet Port including optional Ethernet Hub Ports

ITU standardization compliance

The following list provides voice/data applications and telephony support for BCM50 3.0: G.711 and G.729AB codecs V.27ter, V.29, and V.17 data modem modulation supported (T.38 fax control gateway) G3 fax T512.1 (Type 1 Receiver DTMF) G.168 H.323 Q.931

NN40020-302

29

Chapter 1
Getting started
About this guide
The Installation and Maintenance Guide describes how to install, configure, and maintain the Business Communications Manager 50 Release 3.0 (BCM50 3.0) systems. The concepts, operations, and tasks described in this guide relate to the hardware of the BCM50 system. This guide provides task-based information about installing the hardware components and performing basic configuration tasks. Use Nortel Business Element Manager, Startup Profile, and Telset Administration to configure various BCM50 parameters. In brief, the information in this guide explains: installing hardware components starting and initializing the system replacing components testing the system

Audience
The Installation and Maintenance Guide is directed to installers who install, configure, and maintain BCM50 3.0 systems. To use this guide, you must: be an authorized BCM50 3.0 installer or administrator within your organization know basic Nortel BCM50 terminology be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology

Acronyms
The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide.
Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 1 of 3)
Acronym ACU AIS APC Description Audio conference unit Alarm indication system American Power Conversion

Installation and Maintenance Guide

30

Chapter 1 Getting started

Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 2 of 3)

Acronym ASM ATA BCM BRI BRI CNIC BRIM CAP CFA CLID CNIC CO CSU CTM DDIM DECT DHCP DIMM DMC DSM DSP DSU DTE DTM FEM FRU GASM GATM KEM KIM KRS LAN LIU MBM MSC MWI NIC ONS Description Analog station module (analog station media bay module) Analog terminal adapter Business Communications Manager Basic rate interface Basic rate interface compact network interface card Basic rate interface module (basic rate interface media bay module) Central answering position Carrier failure alarm Calling line identification Compact network interface card Central office Channel service unit Caller ID trunk module (caller ID trunk media bay module) Digital drop and insert MUX Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications Dynamic host configuration protocol Dual in-line memory module Digital mobility controller Digital station module (digital station media bay module) Digital signal processor Data service unit Data terminal equipment Digital trunk module (digital trunk media bay module) Fiber expansion module Field replaceable unit Global analog station module (global analog station media bay module) Global analog trunk module (global analog trunk media bay module) Key expansion module Key indicator module Keycode retrieval system (Nortel keycode retrieval system) Local area network Line isolation unit Media bay module Media services card Message waiting indication Network interface card on-premise station

NN40020-302

Chapter 1 Getting started

31

Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 3 of 3)

Acronym OSI PCI PEC PSTN PSU QoS RAI RAID REN RFO RMS RPS SAPS SELV SSD UPS USB VMWI VoIP WAN Description Open switch interval Peripheral component interface Processor expansion card Public switched telephone network Power supply unit Quality of service Remote alarm indication Redundant array of independent disks Ringer equivalence number Redundant feature option Root mean square Redundant power supply Station auxiliary power supply Safety extra low voltage System status display Uninterruptable power supply Universal serial bus Visual message waiting indicator Voice over Internet protocol Wide area network

Symbols and text conventions

These symbols highlight critical information for the BCM50 3.0 system.

Caution: Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment.

Danger: Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock.

Warning: Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work improperly.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

32

Chapter 1 Getting started

Note: Alerts you to important information.

Tip: Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task.

Security Note: Indicates a point of system security where you can change a default, or where the administrator must decide on the level of security required for the system.

Warning: Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap before performing the maintenance procedure.

Warning: Alerts you to remove the BCM50 main unit and expansion unit power cords from the AC outlet before performing any maintenance procedure. These conventions and symbols represent the Business Series Terminal display and dialpad.
Convention Word in a special font (shown in the top line of the display) Underlined word in capital letters (shown in the bottom line of a two-line display telephone) Dialpad buttons Example Used for Command line prompts on display telephones.

Pswd:

PLAY

Display options on two-line display telephones. Press the button directly below the option on the display to proceed. Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option.

These text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described:
Convention Description

bold Courier text

Indicates command names, options, and text that you must enter. Example: Use the info command. Example: Enter show ip {alerts|routes}. Indicates book titles.

italic text

NN40020-302

Chapter 1 Getting started

33

Convention

Description

plain Courier text

Indicates command syntax and system output (for example, prompts and system messages). Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters Indicates that you press the button with the corresponding icon on the telephone you are using.

FEATURE HOLD RELEASE

Related publications
This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide. Two publication types are available: Technical Documents on page 33 and User Guides on page 34.

Technical Documents System Installation

BCM50 3.0 Upgrade Guide (NN40020-401) Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide (NN40020-308) Keycode Installation Guide (NN40010-301) R2MFC Media Bay Module Installation and Configuration Guide (NN40010-300)

System Programming
Administration Guide (NN40020-600) Device Configuration Guide (NN40020-300) Networking Configuration Guide (NN40020-603) Telset Administration Guide (NN40020-604)

Telephones and Peripherals

Telephony Device Installation Guide (NN40020-309)

Digital Mobility
DECT Deployment and Demonstration Tool Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide (NN40010-302) T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide (NN40110-300)

Installation and Maintenance Guide

34

Chapter 1 Getting started

IP Telephony
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide (NN40050-301)

Call Pilot
CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide (NN40090-300) CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide (NN40090-500)

User Guides
There are no references to specific user guides.

How to get help

This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting Help from the Nortel Web site

The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support Web site: http://www.nortel.com/support This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to: download software, documentation, and product bulletins search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment open and manage technical support cases

Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center

If you dont find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site, and have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center. In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835). Outside North America, go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region: http://www.nortel.com/callus

NN40020-302

Chapter 1 Getting started

35

Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code

To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to: http://www.nortel.com/erc

Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

36

Chapter 1 Getting started

NN40020-302

37

Chapter 2
Introducing the BCM50 hardware
The Business Communications Manager 50 Release 3.0 (BCM50 3.0) provides private network and telephony management capability to small- and medium-sized businesses. The BCM50 system: integrates voice and data capabilities, IP Telephony gateway functions, and data-routing features into a single telephony system provides telephony applications for use in a business environment provides a DHCP enhancement feature for the main units with integrated router

For information about the BCM50 hardware components: Main units on page 37 BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules on page 42 BCM50 hardware on page 52 BCM50 components on page 54 Field-replaceable units on page 59

Main units
The primary hardware component in the BCM50 system is the main unit. The six BCM50 main units are divided into two series: standard and basic rate interface (BRI). The BRI (or b) series main units include BRI ports that replace the four analog lines (on the RJ-21 telephony connector) on the standard series. Note: The generic term main unit, used throughout this document, refers to any of the six main units (BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be) available for a BCM50 system. To indicate features specific to a particular variation of main unit, that variation of main unit is clearly identified (for example, BCM50ba).

Standard series BCM50 main unit (with Telephony only) The BCM50 main unit provides call processing and simple data networking functions. It provides connections for 12 digital telephones, 4 (PSTN) lines, 4 analog station ports, and 4 connections for auxiliary equipment (auxiliary ringer, page relay, page output, and music source). The BCM50 main unit has no router, but it has 4 LAN ports: one is the OAM port for technicians, and the other three are for basic LAN connectivity. See the figure BCM50 main unit ports and connectors on page 39.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

38

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

BCM50a main unit (with ADSL router) The BCM50a main unit provides all the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit, and it has an integrated ADSL router for advanced data applications. For detailed configuration information, see the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide. See the figure BCM50a main unit ports and connectors on page 39. BCM50e main unit (with Ethernet router) The BCM50e main unit provides all the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit, and it has an integrated Ethernet router for advanced data applications. For detailed configuration information, see the BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide. See the figure BCM50e main unit ports and connectors on page 39. BRI series (b series)available only in EMEA and APAC regions BCM50b main unit The BCM50b main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50 main unit. The difference is that the BCM50b main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector. See the figure BCM50b main unit ports and connectors on page 40. BCM50ba main unit (with ADSL router) The BCM50ba main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50a main unit. The difference is that the BCM50ba main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector. For detailed configuration information, see the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide. See the figure BCM50ba main unit ports and connectors on page 40. BCM50be main unit (with Ethernet router) The BCM50be main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50e main unit. The difference is that the BCM50be main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector. For detailed configuration information, see the BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide. See the figure BCM50be main unit ports and connectors on page 40.

For descriptions of the main unit ports and connectors, see the table Main unit ports/connectors and descriptions on page 41. A main unit contains the following field-replaceable units: 1 programmed hard disk 1 cooling fan 1 router card (BCM50a and BCM50e only)

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

39

Figure 1 BCM50 main unit ports and connectors

OAM (port 0) LAN (port 1) Expansion/LAN (port 2, port 3) Music source

USB

Retention clip mounting hole Power

Reset switch

RJ-21 telephony connector

Figure 2 BCM50a main unit ports and connectors

WAN Additional LAN

Retention clip mounting hole Power

OAM (port 0)

LAN Expansion/ LAN (port 1) (port 2, port 3)

Reset switch

Music source

USB

RJ-21 telephony connector

Figure 3 BCM50e main unit ports and connectors

WAN Additional LAN

Retention clip mounting hole Power

OAM (port 0)

LAN (port 1)

Expansion/ LAN (port 2, port 3)

Reset switch

Music source

USB

RJ-21 telephony connector

Installation and Maintenance Guide

40

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Figure 4 BCM50b main unit ports and connectors

OAM (port 0) LAN (port 1) Expansion/LAN (port 2, port 3) Music source

USB

BRI ports

Retention clip mounting hole Power

Reset switch

RJ-21 telephony connector

Figure 5 BCM50ba main unit ports and connectors

WAN Additional LAN BRI ports

Retention clip mounting hole Power

OAM (port 0)

LAN Expansion/ LAN (port 1) (port 2, port 3)

Reset switch

Music source

USB

RJ-21 telephony connector

Figure 6 BCM50be main unit ports and connectors

WAN Additional LAN BRI ports

Retention clip mounting hole Power

OAM (port 0)

LAN (port 1)

Expansion/ LAN (port 2, port 3)

Reset switch

Music source

USB

RJ-21 telephony connector

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

41

Table 1 Main unit ports/connectors and descriptions

Port/connector Power connector Retention clip mounting hole OAM port (port 0) LAN port (port 1) Description A barrel connector jack used to connect the power supply to the main unit. A small hole into which you insert the retention clip. The retention clip secures the power connector to the unit. An RJ-45 jack used to connect a computer running administration software, such as Element Manager, to the main unit. An RJ-45 jack used to connect the customer LAN to the main unit.

Expansion/LAN ports (ports 2 Two RJ-45 jacks used to connect the expansion units to the main unit. The expansion and 3) ports can also provide connections to the Ethernet switch internal to the main unit. If the BCM50 system has no expansion units connected to these ports, you can use the expansion/LAN ports to connect additional devices to the LAN. Note: Activate the feature for the expansion ports by selecting this feature when you generate your keycode. If you purchase only one expansion port feature, the expansion port on the left (port 2) is active. WAN port For BCM50a: An RJ-11 jack used to connect the BCM50a main unit to the ADSL line (BCM50a and BCM50e only). provided by your Internet service provider (ISP). For BCM50e: An RJ-45 jack used to connect the BCM50e to the Ethernet port of a WAN edge device (for example, an external ADSL modem or cable modem). Note: This port is not available on the BCM50 main unit. Additional LAN ports Four RJ-45 jacks that provide connections to the Ethernet switch in the BCM50a and (BCM50a and BCM50e only). BCM50e main units. You can use these ports to connect additional devices to the LAN. Note 1: These ports are not available on the BCM50 main unit. Note 2: The BCM50 Release 1 hardware has three additional LAN (RJ-45) ports. BRI ports (BCM50b series only). Two RJ-45 jacks that provide connections for BRI trunks from the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). On the BCM50b series main units, the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are not available. Note: The BRI ports feature is activated by selecting this feature when you generate your keycode. If you do not purchase this feature, the BRI ports are unavailable. A button to activate the reset feature. Use a long thin tool to press the button. Warning: The reset feature erases programming information; use the feature with care. A phono jack used to connect a music source to the main unit. If you use this port, the music source connections on the RJ-21 telephony connector are disabled. A USB 1.1-compatible port used to connect a USB storage device or the data interface for an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) to the main unit. The main unit uses the data interface for the UPS to monitor and control the UPS functions. To connect both a USB storage device and a UPS data interface, an industry-standard USB hub (USB 1.1-compatible) is required. Note: You must format the USB storage device for the FAT32 file system. If necessary, reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into a USB port on your computer, right-clicking the USB device icon, and selecting FAT32 reformatting. This destroys any data on the USB. An RJ-21 port used to connect telephony devices to the main unit. The four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are available only with the Standard series main units. The BRI series main units include onboard BRI ports instead of the analog lines.

Reset switch

Music source port USB port

RJ-21 telephony connector

Installation and Maintenance Guide

42

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Warning: External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer, page relay, page output, and music-on-hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage (SELV). All four interfaces are SELV, and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV. If these interfaces are not SELV, you must use external line isolation units (LIU).

BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules

In addition to a main unit, the BCM50 system can have up to two BCM50 expansion units. An expansion unit connects to the main unit and provides additional functionality. For expansion unit port locations and descriptions, see the figure BCM50 expansion unit connections on page 42 and the table BCM50 expansion unit ports, connectors, and descriptions on page 42. The BCM50 expansion unit accommodates one media bay module (MBM) that connects additional telephony equipment to the BCM50 system. The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and stations. For a list of trunk and station MBMs that can be used with your BCM50 system, see the table Trunk MBMs on page 45 and the table Station MBMs on page 47. For a complete list of MBMs with links to additional information, see also the table Media bay modules on page 59. Ensure that the MBM dip switches are set correctly (see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96).
Figure 7 BCM50 expansion unit connections

LAN port Retention clip mounting hole

MBM bay

Ejector

Expansion port

Power

Table 2 BCM50 expansion unit ports, connectors, and descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)

Port/connector LAN port (port 1) Description An RJ-45 jack used to connect the customer LAN to the main unit. The LAN port on the expansion unit connects to the internal Ethernet switch on the main unit. You can use the expansion unit LAN port to connect an additional device to the LAN. A barrel connector jack used to connect the power supply to the expansion unit.

Power connector

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

43

Table 2 BCM50 expansion unit ports, connectors, and descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)

Port/connector Retention clip mounting hole Expansion port Ejector MBM bay Description A small hole into which you insert the retention clip. The retention clip secures the power connector to the expansion unit. An RJ-45 jack used to connect the expansion unit to the main unit. The ejector is used to remove the media bay module from the expansion unit. A slot into which you install an MBM.

To connect an MBM to the BCM50 system, you must install the MBM in the expansion unit, and then connect the expansion unit to the main unit. See Installing an expansion unit on page 95 for more information about installing an expansion unit.

Warning: Make sure you disconnect the power supply to the expansion unit before inserting or removing an MBM. The supplied Ethernet cable (shielded) connects the expansion port on the expansion unit to one of the two expansion ports on the main unit. See the figure Expansion unit and expansion connectors on page 43. Expansion unit 1 maps to buses 5/6 (port2), while expansion unit 2 maps to buses 7/8 (port 3).
Figure 8 Expansion unit and expansion connectors
Expansion unit 1 Main unit Expansion unit 2

Buses 5/6

Buses 7/8

The LAN port on the expansion unit is connected to the internal Ethernet switch on the main unit. You can use the expansion unit LAN port to connect an additional device to the LAN.

Note: When you plug an expansion unit into the correct port on the main unit, the LEDs on the expansion unit port light, while the LEDs on the main unit port turn off.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

44

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Note: When generating your keycode, you must select the feature for the expansion ports you require. If your keycode contains the feature for one expansion port only, the expansion port on the left (port 2) is active.

Media bay modules

The media bay modules (MBM) connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and extensions. You can install one MBM in an expansion unit and you can connect up to two expansion units to the BCM50 system. Note: To determine which media bay modules and which types of trunk lines are available in your location, see Interface availability on page 243. The back of the MBM has a single connector that provides signaling channels, media channels, and power to the MBM. This connector plugs into the MBM backplane in the expansion unit. Some MBMs also have a cooling fan that operates using the MBM power source. The figure Media bay module connectors (rear view) on page 44 shows the rear views of the two types of MBMs.
Figure 9 Media bay module connectors (rear view)

Signaling, media, and power connector

Cooling fan

Signaling, media, and power connector

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

45

Trunk media bay modules

Trunk media bay modules connect telecommunications lines to the BCM50 system. The table Trunk MBMs on page 45 lists the types of trunk media bay modules that are available for the BCM50 system.
Table 3 Trunk MBMs
Module type DTM (see Digital trunk media bay module on page 45) BRIM (see Basic rate interface media bay module on page 46) GATM4/GATM8 (see Global Analog Trunk Module on page 46) ADID4/ADID8 (see Analog direct inward dialing media bay module on page 47) R2MFC Function Connects digital public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 3.0 system. Connects a maximum of four ISDN BRI S/T interfaces. Connects either four (GATM4) or eight (GATM8) analog public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 3.0 system. Connects either four (ADID4) or eight (ADID8) analog DID interfaces. Provides MFC-R2 connectivity over an E1 trunk. Special notes Can connect to T1 or PRI-E1/T1 interfaces.

For details about the R2MFC MBM, see the R2MFC Media Bay Module Installation and Configuration Guide (NN40010-300).

Note: See Market profile attributes on page 243 for supported regions.

Digital trunk media bay module

The digital trunk media bay module (DTM) connects to a standard digital PSTN T1 or E1 carrier: On North American BCM50 systems, the DTM connects a T1 (24 channel) or PRI (23 channel) circuit to the BCM50. This PRI interface supports the NI-2 and MCDN protocol variants. On International BCM50 systems, the DTM connects a 30 channel PRI, DASS2, or DPNSS circuit to the BCM50. This PRI interface supports the ETSI Euro, ETSI QSIG, and MCDN protocol variants.

The front bezel of the DTM has an RJ-48C connector that connects the DTM to the service provider connection point. The faceplate also has a set of monitor jacks you can use to monitor the span. Six additional LEDs are on the front of the DTM. For information about these additional LEDs, see DTM LEDs on page 67. The figure DTM faceplate on page 46 shows the DTM module interfaces.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

46

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Figure 10 DTM faceplate

Monitor jacks

RJ-48C digital telephone line connector

Basic rate interface media bay module

The basic rate interface media bay module (BRIM) connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN loops to the BCM50 system. The BRIM recognizes only the T-interface used in European networks. To use the BRIM with the U-interface, typical in North American networks, you require an external NT1 box to convert the U-interface to a T-interface. Each BRI ISDN loop you connect adds two telephone lines to the BCM50 system. Therefore, each BRIM adds a maximum of eight lines to the BCM50 system through the four RJ-48C jacks on the faceplate. The LEDs beside each RJ-48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active. The figure BRIM faceplate on page 46 shows the BRIM faceplate LEDs and connections.
Figure 11 BRIM faceplate

Global Analog Trunk Module

The Global Analog Trunk Module (GATM) provides an interface for four or eight analog public switched telephone network lines. This module supports both pulse and tone dialing, as well as Caller ID and Disconnect Supervision in selected markets throughout the world. The GATM uses an RJ-21 connector as the trunk interface. The figure GATM faceplate on page 47 shows the GATM faceplate LEDs and RJ-21 connector. The module is available either in four-port (GATM4) or eight-port (GATM8) configurations.

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

47

Figure 12 GATM faceplate

Analog direct inward dialing media bay module

The analog direct inward dialing (ADID) MBM provides an interface for four or eight analog public switched telephone network (PSTN) lines. The ADID MBM supports both pulse and tone dialing as well as disconnect supervision, and direct inward dialing call progress signaling as described in standard TIA-464C. The ADID MBM uses an RJ-21 connector for trunk connections. The figure ADID faceplate on page 47 shows the ADID faceplate LEDs and connectors. The ADID is available either in four-port (ADID4) or eight-port (ADID8) configurations.
Figure 13 ADID faceplate

Station media bay modules

Station MBMs connect telephones and analog telecommunication devices to the BCM50 system. The table Station MBMs on page 47 lists the available station media bay modules.
Table 4 Station MBMs (Sheet 1 of 2)
Module type DSM16+/ DSM32+ (see Digital station media bay module on page 48) What it does Special Notes

Connects a maximum of 16 (DSM16+) or 32 (DSM32+) digital telephones to the BCM50 system.

4x16 Connects a maximum of four analog public switched telephone lines to the Combination of a CTM4 and a DSM16 BCM50 system. (see 4x16 media bay module on page 48) Also connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones to the BCM50 system.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

48

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Table 4 Station MBMs (Sheet 2 of 2)

Module type G4x16/G8x16 Combination of a GATM4/GATM8 and a DSM16 (see G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module on page 49) GASM (ASM8) (see Analog station media bay modules on page 49) What it does Connects a maximum of four (G4x16) or eight (G8x16) analog public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 system. Also connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones to the BCM50 system. Special Notes

Connects a maximum of eight analog devices to the BCM50 system. This module provides the following additional services: caller ID, pass through, message waiting indication, and disconnect supervision at the telephone. This module downloads new firmware.

Note: See Market profile attributes on page 243 for supported regions.

Digital station media bay module

The digital station media bay modules (DSM) support digital telephones on the BCM50 system. This section describes the DSM16+ and DSM32+ media bay modules. See the figure DSM faceplate LEDs and connectors on page 48. The digital station media bay modules have the following characteristics: DSM16+supports 16 digital telephones through one RJ-21 connector. DSM 32+supports 32 digital telephones through two RJ-21 connectors.

Figure 14 DSM faceplate LEDs and connectors

DSM 16

DSM 32

4x16 media bay module

The 4x16 MBM provides both analog trunk connections and digital telephone connections. This MBM provides connections for four analog trunk lines and 16 digital telephones. Each of the four analog trunk lines support Caller ID and disconnect supervision. You can use an analog telephony device, such as a modem, fax, or telephone to share the trunk through the Aux port beside Line 1. The figure 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors on page 49 shows the 4x16 MBM. The 4x16 MBM has one RJ-21 connector and five RJ-11 connectors on the faceplate.

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

49

Figure 15 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors

G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module

The G4x16 MBM is a combination of GATM4 and DSM16 MBMs, while the G8x16 is a combination of GATM8 and DSM16 MBMs. The figure G4x16/G8x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors on page 49 shows the G4x16/G8x16 MBM faceplate with two RJ-21 (amphenol) connectors. The upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector connects 16 digital telephones to the system, while the lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector connects 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines with pulse and tone dialing, caller ID, and disconnect supervision in selected markets.
Figure 16 G4x16/G8x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors

RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 16 digital telephones RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines

Analog station media bay modules

The analog station media bay modules (ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM) can connect to a maximum of eight analog telecommunication devices. These devices are standard analog telephones, cordless telephones, fax machines, answering machines, or modems. The maximum speed for a modem connection is 28.8 Kb/s. In addition to ASM8 features, the ASM8+ and GASM offer the following features: Visual Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI): LED indicates to the end user that a message is waiting. Caller ID: provides the name, phone number, and other information about the caller to the end user at the start of the call. Firmware downloading capability: The core can upgrade the ASM8+ and GASM firmware at customer sites.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

50

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Enhanced ringing capability: ASM8+ and GASM provide a ringing voltage of 2 REN/65 V rms per port. The GASM8 is designated as an on-premise station (ONS) port. This device provides telecommunications ringing voltages and can be configured to provide voltage message waiting indicator (VMWI) voltage levels. Installation of this device and all connections to this device must be performed by qualified telecommunications service personnel who are aware of the hazards associated with telecommunications wiring and are aware of the local regulations for treatment of telecommunications wiring for ONS deployment. Disconnect supervision (Open Switch Interval (OSI) as per EIA/TIA 464): indicates to the attached device, in an established communication, that the connected device releases the call.

Disconnect supervision note: When disconnect happens from the Central Office (CO), the ASM8+ provides an open switch interval (OSI) to the off-hook station of 850 milliseconds (ms) (TIA/EIA 464 section 5.4.10.2.4, minimum is 600 ms) as a disconnect signal. If the station remains on-hook after the disconnect signal, the ASM8+ disconnects the station equipment from the network without returning a tone (TIA/EIA 464 section 5.4.10.2.5[1]). After the station equipment goes on-hook, the ASM8+ station interface is restored to on-hook (idle). You must ensure the device, application, or interface card connected to an ASM8+ station interface conforms to these on-hook and off-hook conditions. The ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM each has one RJ-21 connector on the faceplate. The figure GASM faceplate LEDs and connectors on page 50 shows the GASM.
Figure 17 GASM faceplate LEDs and connectors

The ringer equivalency number (REN) (per port) for ASM8 is 1; the REN for ASM8+ and GASM is 2. Note: The termination of the analog interface can consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed the REN of the interface to which the device is connected.

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

51

The table ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications on page 51 shows the specifications for ATA2, ASM8, GASM, and GASI.
Table 5 ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications (Sheet 1 of 2) Specification
Ringing frequency (North America) Ringing frequency (Europe)

ATA2
20 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz

ASM8
20 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz

ASM8+
20 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz

GASM
20 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz

GASI
20 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz

Ringing voltage (North 80 V rms 10% 55 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% America) Ringing voltage (Europe) Loop current Battery feed voltage FIC code Ringer equivalency number 75 V rms 10% N/A 20 mA minimum 48 V dc 10% OL13ABC 3 20 mA minimum 48 V dc 10% N/A 1 N/A 65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% 20 mA minimum 29 V dc 10% N/A 2 N/A 20 mA minimum 48 V dc 10% N/A 2 N/A 20 mA minimum 48 V dc 10% N/A 2 N/A

ATA2 to BCM50 loop 135 ohms resistance (cable only) (800 m of 0.5-mm wire or 2600 ft of 24-AWG wire) Analog loop resistance on terminal side for voice applications (cable only) Analog loop resistance on terminal side for data applications (cable only) Input impedance at tip and ring Return loss 1300 ohms (7200 m of 0.5-mm wire or 26000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 200 ohms (1231 m of 0.5-mm wire or 4000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 600 ohms > 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz (when terminated with 600 ohms)

250 ohms (1538 m of 0.5-mm wire or 5000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 250 ohms (1538 m of 0.5-mm wire or 5000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 600 ohms > 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz (when terminated with 600 ohms)

200 ohms (1231 m of 0.5-mm wire or 4000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 200 ohms (1231 m of 0.5-mm wire or 4000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 600 ohms > 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz (when terminated with 600 ohms)

200 ohms (1231 m of 0.5-mm wire or 4000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 200 ohms (1231 m of 0.5-mm wire or 4000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 600 ohms > 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz (when terminated with 600 ohms)

200 ohms (1231 m of 0.5-mm wire or 4000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 200 ohms (1231 m of 0.5-mm wire or 4000 ft of 24-AWG wire) 600 ohms > 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz (when terminated with 600 ohms)

Insertion loss on an internal call Insertion loss on an external call

ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 dB dB dB dB dB ATA2 to BCM50 loss 2.2 dB 1.0 dB; BCM50 to ATA2 loss 0.5 dB 1.0 dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB 1.0 dB; BCM50 to ASM loss 0.5 dB 1.0 dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB 1.0 dB; BCM50 to ASM loss 0.5 dB 1.0 dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB 1.0 dB; BCM50 to ASM loss 0.5 dB 1.0 dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB 1.0 dB; BCM50 to ASM loss 0.5 dB 1.0 dB

Installation and Maintenance Guide

52

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Table 5 ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications (Sheet 2 of 2) Specification
MWI type (see Note)

ATA2
Stutter tone

ASM8
Stutter tone

ASM8+
Stutter tone/ Voltage MWI (CO: 120 V) OSI EIA/TIA 464 section 4.5.10.2.4/ 4.5.10.2.5.1

GASM
Stutter tone/ Reverse polarity/ Voltage MWI (CO: 120 V)

GASI
Stutter Tone/ Reverse polarity/ Voltage MWI (PBX: 90 V)

Disconnect supervision types

N/A

N/A

OSI EIA/TIA 464 N/A section 4.5.10.2.4/ 4.5.10.2.5.1

Note: The MWI type depends on the country profile, and the MWI voltage shown is a maximum value.

BCM50 hardware
The following BCM50 hardware items simplify the setup and connection of the system: Rack-mount shelf on page 52 Wall-mount bracket on page 53 Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure on page 54 Patch panel on page 53 Wiring field card on page 54

Rack-mount shelf
To rack-mount a BCM50 unit (main unit or expansion unit), you need a rack-mount shelf. The rack-mount shelf mounts in a standard 19-inch equipment rack. The BCM50 unit then clips into the tabs on the rack-mount shelf. These tabs prevent the unit from sliding or falling off the shelf. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you can clip another unit to a second set of tabs on the rack-mount shelf. You can clip additional units to tabs on the top of the other units. See the figure Rack-mount shelf installed in equipment rack on page 52.
Figure 18 Rack-mount shelf installed in equipment rack

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

53

Patch panel
The BCM50 patch panel simplifies the connections of lines and extensions to the main unit. The BCM50 patch panel installs into the rack-mount shelf in a standard equipment rack and connects to the RJ-21 telephony connector with a user-supplied RJ-21 cable. See the figure Patch panel connectors on page 53. Note: The four analog lines on the patch panel are only available with the standard main units. The four analog lines are not available with the BRI series (b-series) main units.

Figure 19 Patch panel connectors

01

02

03

04

01

02

03

04

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

Wall-mount bracket
To wall-mount a BCM50 unit (main unit or expansion unit), you need a wall-mount bracket. The wall-mount bracket is attached to the wall, and the unit is connected to the wall-mount bracket. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you need a wall-mount bracket for each unit. Each wall-mount bracket includes a cable-management tray that you use to store and organize the cables connected to the BCM50 units. See the figure Wall-mount bracket on page 53.
Figure 20 Wall-mount bracket

Installation and Maintenance Guide

54

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure

There are two BCM50 power supply mounting options that enable you to install your power supply units next to your BCM50 system and keep the power cables neatly organized: Power supply mounting enclosure accommodates up to three power supplies in a case that is similar in size and shape to a BCM50 unit. You can install the power supply mounting enclosure in the same way as BCM50 unit (in a rack, on a wall, or on a desktop). Single power supply mounting bracket accommodates a single power supply for wall-mount applications.

Wiring field card

The wiring field card (WFC) simplifies the connections of lines and extensions to the main unit. The WFC installs into the cable-management tray of the wall-mount bracket and connects to the RJ-21 telephony connector through a 50-pin header. The WFC contains 12 eight-pin modular jacks for digital stations, 4 eight-pin modular jacks for analog trunks, and 4 eight-pin modular jacks for analog stations. The eight-pin modular jacks accept RJ-45 or RJ-11 modular plugs. A terminal block is available to connect auxiliary equipment. A 50-pin header connects to the BCM50. See the figure Wiring field card on page 54. Note: The four analog lines on the WFC are only available with the standard main units. The four analog lines are not available with the BRI series (b-series) main units.

Figure 21 Wiring field card

50-pin header Terminal block

Connectors for digital stations

Connectors for analog trunks

Connectors for analog stations

BCM50 components
For descriptions of the BCM50 components: Power supply on page 55 Power supply adapter cord (international users) on page 55 Uninterruptable power supply on page 55

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

55

Hard disk on page 56 Router card on page 59 Cooling fan on page 57 RJ-21 telephony connector on page 58

Power supply
The power supply is an external device that connects to the BCM50 units. See the figure BCM50 power supply on page 55. You must have one power supply for each unit in your BCM50 system.
Figure 22 BCM50 power supply

To BCM50 unit

Power supply cord

Power supply cable (NA shown)

To wall outlet

A BCM50 power supply is included with each main unit and expansion unit. In addition, international (non-North American) users require a power supply adapter cord for each main unit and expansion unit.

Power supply adapter cord (international users)

The power supply adapter cord is for international (non-North American) BCM50 users. The cord connects to the power supply on one end and to the (C-14) BCM50 power bar on the other end. You require one power supply adapter cord for each power supply you want to connect to the power bar.

Uninterruptable power supply

An uninterruptable power supply (UPS) is an optional device that maintains continuous operation during a power interruption or failure. The UPS provides power source monitoring and battery backup activation so that critical BCM50 functionality is maintained. During a power failure, the UPS provides sufficient time to either correct the problem or activate a contingency plan to sustain services. The UPS performs a graceful shutdown of the BCM50 two minutes before the UPS battery power is drained.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

56

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

The BCM50 supports American Power Conversion (APC) UPS devices that use a USB control interface. The APC UPSs include the APC UPS-Smart family (for example, UPS-Smart 750 and UPS-Smart 1000) and UPS-Back family (for example, UPS-Back 500 ES and UPS-Back 350 ES). You can use the UPS control software to configure various operational settings.

Note: For the UPS to function correctly, you must connect it before you power up the BCM50 system. If you connect a UPS to a running system, the UPS does not function. The USB port on the UPS uses a different communication speed than the USB port on the BCM50 system. Due to this difference, you must use an industry-standard USB hub (USB 1.1-compatible) to connect the UPS data connection to the BCM50 system. The USB hub not only provides additional USB ports, it converts the data communication speed so the UPS and BCM50 system can communicate properly. On BCM50 systems with more than one unit, you must connect the power supplies for all the units must to a single UPS. The interaction between the UPS and the BCM50 occurs in three stages: 1 2 3 ConfigurationThis stage sends configuration information to the UPS device and requires minimal user interaction. MonitoringThis stage is a steady-state, periodic monitoring cycle where the BCM50 reads the status of the UPS. This stage requires minimal user interaction. Failure conditionThis stage initiates an action when a threshold value is surpassed.

The BCM50 system requires user interaction in the case of a planned system shutdown. You must manually power down the UPS and the BCM50 main unit when performing a system shutdown. The UPS feature is supported in all markets (110~120V and 220~240V power standards).

Hard disk
Each main unit contains a single hard disk and a hard disk bracket to install it in the main unit. See the figure Hard disk and bracket on page 57. For installation and replacement instructions, see Replacing an internal component on page 193.

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

57

Figure 23 Hard disk and bracket

Hard disk

Hard disk bracket

Cooling fan
The main units have one cooling fan. The expansion unit has two cooling fans. See the figure Cooling fan on page 57.
Figure 24 Cooling fan

fan connector

The cooling fan mounts in the back of the BCM50 enclosure. For information about how to install or replace the cooling fan, see Replacing an internal component on page 193.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

58

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

RJ-21 telephony connector

Use the RJ-21 telephony connector to connect a 25-pair (RJ-21) cable to the main unit. Then use these 25 pairs of wires to connect to the following telephony devices (see RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 207): Four analog lines (standard main units only) Use these connections for analog trunks from the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are not available on the BRI series (b-series) main units. Four analog telephones Use these connections for analog telephony devices such as single-line telephones, fax machines, and modems. Auxiliary ringer Use this connection for an auxiliary ringer (customer supplied). The BCM50 system uses the auxiliary ringer to control the cadence of an auxiliary ringer. You must use this output in a low-current, low-voltage application only. Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly. Page output Use this connection to connect an internally generated voice-paging signal to an external paging amplifier (customer supplied). Page relay When you use the page output to connect an external paging amplifier, you also use the page relay. The page relay connects to a floating relay contact pair. The BCM50 system uses the page relay to control the external paging amplifier. Music input Use the Music input to connect an external music source that supplies a signal to held lines (music on hold) or telephone speakers (background music). The input source can be any available radio or music source approved for connection to the network. If you use this connection, do not use the Music input jack on the main unit faceplate. Twelve digital telephones Use these connections for digital telephones. For a list of digital telephones that are compatible with the BCM50 system, see the Telephony Device Installation Guide (NN40020-309). Warning: External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer, page relay, page output, and music-on-hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage (SELV). All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV. If these interfaces are not SELV, you must use external line isolation units (LIU).

Note: The analog trunk interfaces and analog telephony device interfaces on the RJ-21 telephony connector are compatible with the North American telephony interface standards only. If your BCM50 system is in a country that uses a different telephony standard, you must use media bay modules for your analog trunks and media bay modules or ATAs for your analog telephony devices.

NN40020-302

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

59

Router card
The BCM50e main unit has a router card that uses an Ethernet interface to connect to a WAN edge device (for example, an external ADSL modem or a cable modem). The BCM50a main unit has a router card that uses an ADSL interface to connect the BCM50 system to the Internet Service Provider (ISP). For information about replacing the router card, see Replacing an internal component on page 193.

Field-replaceable units
The table Field-replaceable units on page 59 and the table Media bay modules on page 59 provide a list of field-replaceable units (FRU) and media bay modules (MBM) for the BCM50 system. Use these tables as references when you need to order, replace, or install hardware components. The tables provide references to the component descriptions and installation procedures.

Note: The product engineering code (PEC) can change over time; consult the catalog for the latest information.
Table 6 Field-replaceable units
Component description Router card with Ethernet connector Router card with ADSL interface Hard disk, programmed Power supply Cooling fan FRU Description Router card Router card Hard disk Power supply Cooling fan Replacement procedure Replacing an internal component Replacing an internal component Replacing an internal component Replacing a power supply Replacing an internal component

Table 7 Media bay modules (Sheet 1 of 2)

Component description 4x16 MBM Analog DID ASM8 MBM BRIM MBM DSM16+ MBM DSM32+ MBM DTM MBM FRU Description 4x16 media bay module Analog direct inward dialing media bay module Analog station media bay modules Basic rate interface media bay module Digital station media bay module Digital station media bay module Digital trunk media bay module Installation procedure To install an MBM To install an MBM To install an MBM To install an MBM To install an MBM To install an MBM To install an MBM

Installation and Maintenance Guide

60

Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware

Table 7 Media bay modules (Sheet 2 of 2)

Component description G4x16/G8x16 MBM GASM MBM GATM4/GATM8 MBM FRU Description G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module Analog station media bay modules Global Analog Trunk Module Installation procedure To install an MBM To install an MBM To install an MBM

Accessories
You can use the following accessories with the BCM50 system: Station auxiliary power supply (SAPS)provides power for the central answering position (CAP) when you connect the 7316E to five or more KIMs. You can also extend the loop length between a telephone or terminal and the BCM50 system from 1000 to 2600 feet. You must use a dedicated cable to connect the two locations. Analog Terminal Adapter 2 (ATA2)converts digital signals to analog signals to allow communication with analog devices such as fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The ATA2 supports a maximum transmission rate of 28.8 Kb/s. With a single-line telephone, the ATA2 supports a long-loop configuration.

NN40020-302

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

61

Chapter 3
Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs
This section describes the BCM50 system LEDs including BCM50 main unit, expansion unit, and media bay module (MBM) LEDs. For information about the BCM50 system LEDs: System status LEDs on page 61 LAN port LEDs on page 63 ADSL router LEDs (BCM50a and BCM50ba only) on page 64 Ethernet router LEDs (BCM50e and BCM50be only) on page 65 BRI port LEDs on main unit (BRI series only) on page 66 Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) on page 66 DTM LEDs on page 67 BRIM LEDs on page 68

System status LEDs

The two system status LEDs on the BCM50 main units (BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be) show the current state of the BCM50 system. You can view the system status LEDs on the faceplate and on the top of the main unit. See the figure Location of system status LEDs on a main unit on page 62. The bottom LED is the power LED, and the top LED is the status LED. Under normal operating conditions, both LEDs are solid green.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

62

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

Figure 25 Location of system status LEDs on a main unit

Status LED Power LED

The table System status LEDs states and descriptions on page 62 describes the meaning of the system status LEDs after the system boots up and is in service.
Table 8 System status LEDs states and descriptions
Power Solid green Solid green or Flashing green Flashing green Off Status Solid green Solid red Description Normal operation. A Major or Critical alarm is activated on the BCM50. You must clear the status LED using the Element Manager Alarm Panel. The LED does not clear itself. See the Administration Guide for more information. Contact technical support (see How to get help on page 34). No power to BCM50.

Solid green Off

During BCM50 system startup or reboot, the system status LEDs move through a sequence of state changes. If either the power LED or status LED is yellow, the system is initializing and is not ready for service. The table System status LEDs during startup or reboot on page 62 shows the key states indicating service availability.
Table 9 System status LEDs during startup or reboot
Power Solid yellow Flashing or solid green Flashing green Any Flashing or solid yellow Status Description System initializing; not ready for service. System initializing; not ready for service.

Flashing green BCM50 telephony services are available, including IP telephony and voice mail.

NN40020-302

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

63

Table 9 System status LEDs during startup or reboot

Power Solid green Solid green Status Description

Flashing green Administrator can log into BCM50 with Element Manager. Solid green All BCM50 services are functioning, and the system is ready for normal use.

LAN port LEDs

Each LAN port on the main unit and expansion unit has two LEDs. These LEDs indicate the status of the connection for that LAN port. The figure LAN port LED locations on page 63 shows the location of these LEDs on the main units and expansion unit.

Note: The expansion ports on the main unit also function as LAN ports. The expansion port LEDs indicate LAN activity only. The LEDs do not indicate expansion unit presence. The LEDs do not light.
Figure 26 LAN port LED locations
LAN port

LAN port LEDs Expansion port

Router card LAN ports

LAN ports

Expansion/ LAN ports

Installation and Maintenance Guide

64

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

The table LAN port and expansion port LED indicators on page 64 describes the possible LED states for the LAN ports LEDs. Table 10 LAN port and expansion port LED indicators
LED Yellow Green Both LEDs Any LED Status On On Off Flashing Description The LAN port is operating at 10 Mb/s. The LAN port is operating at 100 Mb/s. No connection. The LAN port is sending or receiving network data. The frequency of the flashes increases with increased traffic.

ADSL router LEDs (BCM50a and BCM50ba only)

The three ADSL router LEDs on the faceplate of the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units monitor router status, data, and DSL. The figure ADSL router LEDs on the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units (BCM50a shown) on page 64 shows the location of the three ADSL router LEDs.
Figure 27 ADSL router LEDs on the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units (BCM50a shown)
Router status

Data

DSL

The table ADSL router LED descriptions on page 64 describes the possible ADSL router LED states.
Table 11 ADSL router LED descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)
LED Router status Status On Off Flashing Data Flashing Off Description The router card is functioning properly. The router card is not ready or malfunctioned. The router card is rebooting. The router card is sending or receiving data through the WAN port. The router card is not sending or receiving data through the WAN port.

NN40020-302

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

65

Table 11 ADSL router LED descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)

LED Status On DSL Off Flashing Description The router card is linked successfully to a digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM). The DSL link is not functioning. The router card is initializing the DSL line.

Ethernet router LEDs (BCM50e and BCM50be only)

The three Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units monitor the router status and the WAN port. The figure Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units (BCM50e shown) on page 65 shows the location of the three Ethernet router LEDs.
Figure 28 Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units (BCM50e shown)
Router status WAN port LEDs

WAN port LEDs

The table LAN port LED indicators on page 65 describes the possible Ethernet router LED states.
Table 12 LAN port LED indicators
LED Status On Router status Off Flashing WAN port yellow WAN port green Any WAN port LED Both WAN port LEDs On On Flashing Off Description The router card is functioning properly. The router card is not ready or malfunctioned. The router card is rebooting. The WAN port is operating at 10 Mb/s. The WAN port is operating at 100 Mb/s. The WAN port is sending or receiving network data. The frequency of the flashes increases with increased traffic. No connection.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

66

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

BRI port LEDs on main unit (BRI series only)

The three BRI port LEDs on the BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units monitor the BRI port status. The figure Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units (BCM50e shown) on page 65 shows the location of the BRI ports and LEDs.
Figure 29 BRI port LEDs on the BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units (BCM50b shown)
BRI ports D channel B channel 1 B channel 2

The table BRI port LED indicators on page 66 describes the possible BRI port LED states.
Table 13 BRI port LED indicators
LED (channel) D B1 B2 Status On (green) On (green) On (green) Description D channel is functioning through this BRI port. B channel 1 is functioning through this BRI port. B channel 2 is functioning through this BRI port.

Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only)

The two media bay module (MBM) LEDs on an expansion unit show the power and status of the MBM. The figure MBM LEDs on page 66 shows the location of the (Power) and (Status) LEDs on an MBM. The power and status LEDs are in the same location on all MBMs.
Figure 30 MBM LEDs

Power

Status

NN40020-302

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

67

The table MBM LED descriptions on page 67 describes the possible MBM LED states.
Table 14 MBM LED descriptions
Power Off On On Status Off Off Blinking Description The MBM has no power, or a failure occurred on the MBM power converter. BCM50 to expansion unit failure or system initialization. Hardware is working, but an operational problem exists such as: no link to the main unit is detected frame alignment is lost on messages from the main unit bandwidth not allocated MBM is in maintenance state MBM is in download state (GASM, GATM4/GATM8) The MBM has power, but a hardware problem exists such as: partial failure of power converter thermal overload fan failure The MBM is ready to operate.

Blinking

Blinking

On

On

DTM LEDs
The DTM has additional LEDs that are not on most other MBMs. The figure DTM LEDs on page 67 shows the location of the DTM LEDs.
Figure 31 DTM LEDs

Power LED Status LED In service LED Loopback test LED Receive LEDs Transmit LEDs

The table DTM LED functions on page 67 describes the functions of the DTM LEDs.
Table 15 DTM LED functions (Sheet 1 of 2)
LED Power Status Status Descriptions See Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) for details. See Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) for details.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

68

Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs

Table 15 DTM LED functions (Sheet 2 of 2)

LED In service Loopback test Receive alarm Receive error Transmit alarm Transmit error Status Flashing On On On On On Descriptions The T1, ETSI, or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is running or the DTM is initializing. A continuity loopback test is running. A problem with the received digital transmission. This half-duplex link does not work. A small error as a result of degraded digital transmission. Possible causes are an ohmic connection, water ingress, or too long a loop. The DTM cannot transmit. The DTM sends an alarm indication signal (AIS) to the terminating switch. This half-duplex link does not work. The DTM is sending a remote alarm indication (RAI) carrier failure alarm (CFA) to the terminating switch. If the transmit alarm is not on, this error indicates a far-end or cable problem. The DTM is initializing.

All LEDS

Flashing

BRIM LEDs
The BRIM has one additional LED beside each RJ-48C jack. These LEDs are on when the ISDN line is active. The figure BRIM LEDs on page 68 shows the location of the LEDs on a BRIM.
Figure 32 BRIM LEDs

Power LED Status LED

For more information on the power and status LED functions, see Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) on page 66.

NN40020-302

Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address

69

Chapter 4
Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address
Each main unit has a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server. This DHCP server supplies Nortel IP Phones and client computers with IP addresses and connection information. If the main unit has no integrated router, then you can configure the DHCP server using Element Manager. If the main unit has an integrated router, then you can activate either the DHCP server on the main unit or the DHCP server on the integrated router. If you want to use the DHCP server on the main unit, you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router. For more information about configuring the DHCP server, see the procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page 142. The BCM50 system can have a main unit with or without an integrated router: BCM50 and BCM50b main units (no integrated router) on page 69 BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units (with integrated router) on page 70

BCM50 and BCM50b main units (no integrated router)

By default, the main unit is configured with a dynamic IP address, which means the IP configuration is received from a DHCP server. The BCM50 and BCM50b main units can have two DHCP server configurations: If an external DHCP server is not present on page 69 If an external DHCP server is present on page 70

If an external DHCP server is not present

If an external DHCP server is not present, then the main unit uses the following default IP configuration:
IP address: Subnet mask: Gateway:

192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1

The DHCP server on the main unit supplies IP configuration information for all IP devices (PCs and IP Phones). The DHCP server also supplies specific connection information to the IP Phones.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

70

Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address

If an external DHCP server is present

Warning: The DHCP server on the main unit is enabled (IP Phones only) by default. If your network already contains a DHCP server, then disable the DHCP server on the main unit. For more information about disabling the DHCP server on the main unit, see the procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page 142. If an external DHCP is present, then the BCM50 system uses the IP configuration supplied by the external DHCP server. In this case, the DHCP server on the main unit supplies only IP Phones with IP configuration information. The DHCP server on the main unit does not supply any other devices with IP settings. This means that the administrator need not set up the external DHCP server to supply configuration settings to the IP Phones. The DHCP server on the main unit must configure a range of IP addresses to supply to the IP Phones. The DHCP server uses the top 20 percent of a subnet. For example, if the external DHCP server supplies the IP address 177.218.21.45 (subnet mask is 255.255.255.0) to the BCM50, then the BCM50 DHCP server reserves the range 177.218.21.200 to 177.218.21.254. You can verify and change this default range using Element Manager. The administrator must ensure that this range agrees with the network configurationthe external DHCP server does not use the range.

BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units (with integrated router)
You can select the DHCP server option to use with the BCM50 integrated router main units. You can select to use the integrated router or you can disable the integrated router and use the DHCP server that is on the main unit. Select the DHCP server option through Element Manager (Configuration > Data Services > DHCP Server > General Settings tab). If you select the standard DHCP server on the main unit, you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router. You can then configure the DHCP server functionality in the same way as a non-router version. If you select the DHCP server on the integrated router you can configure the router using the router WebGUI tool. By default, the integrated router is selected and you configure the BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units with a dynamic IP address, meaning that these units request an IP configuration from a DHCP server. Because the integrated router has a DHCP server, this DHCP server responds to the request.

NN40020-302

Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address

71

By default, the router LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1, and the IP address assigned to the BCM50 system is the first IP address in the DHCP pool. If the DHCP pool starts at 192.168.1.190, then the BCM50 is 192.168.1.190 even though the router is 192.168.1.1. Therefore, the BCM50 system receives the IP address 192.168.1.2 (subnet mask is 255.255.255.0) from the DHCP server on the integrated router. The DHCP server on the integrated router supplies the information (primary and secondary TPS server information, VLAN IDs) to the IP Phones enabling the phones to connect to the BCM50. If the IP address of the integrated router changes, then the IP address reserved for the BCM50 automatically changes. The DHCP server on the integrated router automatically updates the S1 and S2 IP address. For more information about configuring a DHCP server for your BCM50 main unit, see the procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page 142.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

72

Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address

NN40020-302

Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system

73

Chapter 5
Installing the BCM50 system
To install a BCM50 system, you must install a BCM50 main unit, any expansion units required, and the telephony components. The figure BCM50 installation overview on page 73 and the table BCM50 installation overview on page 74 provide an overview of the installation process.
Figure 33 BCM50 installation overview

Installation and Maintenance Guide

74

Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system

Table 16 BCM50 installation overview (Sheet 1 of 2)

Tasks Prepare for installation Description Verify these requirements: environmental electrical site telephony wiring Ensure you have these items: basic hardware optional equipment other hardware and tools Verify that the main unit box contains all the required components in good condition. Mount the main unit using these options: in an equipment rack with a rack-mount shelf (optional patch panel) on a wall with a wall-mount bracket (optional wiring field card) on a desktop Verify that the expansion unit box contains all the required components in good condition. Follow these steps to install an MBM: set the MBM dip switches to factory default insert the MBM into the expansion unit Refer to Checking the installation prerequisites on page 77

Get required equipment and tools

System equipment, supplies, and tools on page 79

Inspect the components Install the main unit

Unpacking the main unit on page 82 Installing the main unit on page 81

Inspect the components Install a media bay module (MBM)

Unpacking the expansion unit on page 96 Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96

Install an expansion unit

Mount the expansion unit using the same option as the main Installing the expansion unit: unit on page 101 in an equipment rack with a rack-mount shelf (optional patch panel) on a wall with a wall-mount bracket (optional wiring field card) on a desktop on top of another unit (not for wall-mount option) Connect the cables between these items: main unit to expansion unit (if required) power supply to units (with and without a UPS) lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector (optional patch panel or WFC) lines and extensions to the MBMs auxiliary equipment to the RJ-21 telephony connector (optional patch panel or WFC) Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 103

Connect the cables

NN40020-302

Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system

75

Table 16 BCM50 installation overview (Sheet 2 of 2)

Tasks Install telephones and peripherals Description You can install these telephones: System telephones Emergency telephone IP Phones T7406 cordless system Perform these steps to install an ATA2: connect the ATA2 mount the ATA2 test insertion loss measurement configure the ATA2 Refer to Installing telephones and peripherals on page 119

Install an ATA2

Installing the analog terminal adapter on page 121

Installation and Maintenance Guide

76

Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system

NN40020-302

Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites

77

Chapter 6
Checking the installation prerequisites
Before you install a main unit or expansion unit, perform the following tasks: Determine the location for the BCM50 units, telephones, and other equipment based on space and electrical requirements. Order the required trunks from the central office. Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you need to install the system.

For information about BCM50 installation prerequisites: Environmental requirements on page 77 Electrical requirements on page 77 Site telephony wiring requirements on page 78 System equipment, supplies, and tools on page 79

Environmental requirements
Ensure you meet the installation environmental requirements. The installation area must be: a minimum of 4 m (13 ft.) from equipment such as photocopiers, electrical motors, and other equipment that produces electromagnetic, radio frequency, and electrostatic interference within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of a three-wire grounded electrical outlet clean, dry, well ventilated, and free of traffic and excess dust within the temperature range of 5C and 50C (40F and 120F) from 20% to 80% non condensing relative humidity structurally strong and with enough space to support the BCM50 units a minimum of 46 cm (18 in.) from the floor Note: The installation area must be of sufficient height from the floor to prevent water damage.

Electrical requirements
Ensure you meet the following electrical requirements: Power must be supplied from a non switched, unobstructed outlet within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of the BCM50 units. The supplied power must be a dedicated 110 V to 120 V AC nominal (or 220 V to 240 V AC nominal), 50 to 60 Hz, 15 A minimum service with a third-wire safety ground. The third-wire safety ground provides shock protection and prevents electromagnetic interference.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

78

Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites

Danger: Risk of electric shock The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third-wire ground. Use only with the supplied BCM50 power supply and a three-wire power outlet.

Caution: Check ground connections Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metal water pipe system, if present, are connected. If these ground connections are not connected, contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority. Do not try to make the connections yourself. You can connect the power supply to a power bar. The total length of the power cables from the power supply to the electrical outlet (including power bar) must not exceed 2 m (6.5 ft.). You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body, with a third-wire ground. Nortel recommends that you do not use an extension cord between the power supply and the power bar or between the power bar and the electrical outlet.

Site telephony wiring requirements

The following sections describe the requirements for wiring digital telephony devices (digital loop) and analog telephony devices (analog loop) to the BCM50 system: Digital loop on page 78 Analog loop on page 78

Digital loop
You must meet the following parameters for a digital loop: one, two, or three twisted-pair cables per telephone DC loop resistance of less than 64 cable length (0.5 mm or 24-AWG) less than 300 m (975 ft.) use of a station auxiliary power supply (SAPS) for loops 300 m (975 ft.) to 1200 m (3900 ft.). In North America, the SAPS must be a CSA- or UL-approved Class 2 power source. In Europe, the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked. no bridge taps

Analog loop
You must meet the following parameters for an analog loop: maximum DC loop resistance of 208 maximum cable length (0.5 mm or 24-AWG) of 1220 m (4000 ft.)

NN40020-302

Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites

79

System equipment, supplies, and tools

For the equipment required to install the BCM50 system: Basic hardware on page 79 Optional equipment on page 79 Other hardware and tools on page 79

Basic hardware
The BCM50 system comprises a combination of the following hardware: main unit: BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, or BCM50be expansion unit media bay module (MBM) telephones cabling for connections between hardware units

You can connect a maximum of two expansion units to a BCM50 system. Each expansion unit can contain one MBM.

Note: You require keycodes for some hardware to function.

Optional equipment
You can add the following equipment to the BCM50 system to support specific requirements beyond the basic hardware: station auxiliary power supply (SAPS) analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) if you connect analog equipment to a digital extension line uninterruptable power supply (UPS) USB hub (required if the system uses a UPS)

Other hardware and tools

You need the following equipment to install a BCM50 unit: mounting hardware (either a rack-mount shelf, a wall-mount bracket per unit, or four rubber feet per unit) Phillips #2 screwdriver flat blade screwdriver pliers antistatic grounding strap punch-down tool

Installation and Maintenance Guide

80

Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites

surge protector (recommended) cables, 25-pair cable with right-feeding female RJ-21 connectors 3.5-mm mono audio jack (for external music source)

NN40020-302

81

Chapter 7
Installing the main unit
This section describes how to install the main unit. You can install the main unit in an equipment rack, on a wall, or on a desktop. The figure Overview of installing the main unit on page 81 shows the steps required to install the main unit.
Figure 34 Overview of installing the main unit

Installation and Maintenance Guide

82

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

For information about installing the main unit: Unpacking the main unit on page 82 Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 82 Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 86 Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 91

Unpacking the main unit

Open the main unit box and check that you have all of the following components: one main unit (either BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, or BCM50be) one power supply one power supply cable one power supply retention clip four rubber feet one screw to secure the RJ-21 telephony connector one cable tie a documentation CD the Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide

Visually inspect the components for damage during shipping. If you find damage, contact your Nortel sales representative.

Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack

You can install a BCM50 main unit in a standard 19-inch equipment rack along with your other networking and telecommunications equipment. To rack-mount a BCM50 unit, you need the optional rack-mount kit (NT9T6325). This kit provides the parts to mount up to four BCM50 units into a standard 19-inch equipment rack. The BCM50 unit mounts into the tabs on the rack-mount shelf. These tabs prevent the unit from sliding around or falling off the shelf. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you can mount another unit onto a second set of tabs on the rack-mount shelf. You can mount any additional units to tabs on the top of the other units. If you need to better secure a BCM50 unit, use the screws provided (four per unit) to screw the BCM50 to the rack. This is a hardened installation. For a hardened installation, install only two units per rackdo not stack the units. You can also use the optional patch panel to simplify the connections to the BCM50 RJ-21 telephony connector.

Caution: For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM50 system, see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 77.

NN40020-302

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

83

Caution: To keep the BCM50 system operating at the optimal internal temperature, keep the top, sides, and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment. Place no objects, except another BCM50 unit or a power supply mounting enclosure, on top of the main unit. Use the following procedures to install a BCM50 unit in a rack: To install the rack-mount shelf in an equipment rack on page 83 To install the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 84 To install the power supply on the rack-mount shelf on page 92

To install the rack-mount shelf in an equipment rack

1 2 3 4 5 Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the BCM50 unit. Position the rack-mount shelf in the rack. Align the holes in the rack-mount shelf with the holes in the equipment rack rails. Fasten the rack-mount shelf to the rack using the four rack screws (supplied with the rack-mount kit). See the figure Fasten the rack-mount shelf to an equipment rack on page 83. Proceed to Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 83.

Figure 35 Fasten the rack-mount shelf to an equipment rack

Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf

The rack-mount shelf has slots molded into its surface to which you attach the BCM50 units. By attaching the BCM50 units to these slots, you can prevent someone from accidently knocking them off the rack-mount shelf.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

84

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

If you install additional units, you can install a second unit on the shelf beside the first unit. You can install another unit on top of each of the first two units. Nortel recommends a maximum of four units per rack-mount shelf. Select your installation option: To install the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 84 To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit on page 85

To install the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf

1 2 3 4 Place the BCM50 unit on the rack so that the feet of the unit are in the depressions in the shelf. Move the unit forward until the feet touch the front side of the depressions. Slide the unit back until the feet click in place on the slots in the depressions. See the figure Attach the units to the rack-mount shelf on page 84. To further secure the unit, use the four self-tapping screws (for plastic) supplied with the rack-mount kit to attach the unit to the rack-mount shelf. Make sure the screw holes in the unit are aligned with the holes in the rack-mount shelf. Then insert the four screws through the holes in the bottom of the shelf and into the screw holes in the bottom of the unit. Caution: Use only the screws supplied with the rack-mount kit (NT9T6325). Do not replace the screws. Other screws can damage the unit. 5 Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 92.

Figure 36 Attach the units to the rack-mount shelf

NN40020-302

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

85

To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit

1 2 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit. Place the BCM50 unit on top of the other unit. Make sure the feet of the unit are in the slots on the top of the unit and in front of the slots. See the figure BCM50 unit slots and feet on page 85. Slide the unit back until it clicks in place on the slots. Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 92.

3 4

Figure 37 BCM50 unit slots and feet

Slots

Feet

Installing the patch panel (optional)

Install the optional patch panel in the equipment rack.

To install the patch panel

1 2 3 4 5 Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the patch panel. Position the patch panel in the rack. Align the holes in the patch panel with the holes in the equipment rack rails. Fasten the patch panel to the rack using the four rack screws (supplied with the patch panel). Continue with the procedure To connect the cables to the patch panel (optional) on page 117.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

86

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall

To wall-mount a BCM50 unit, you need a wall-mount bracket. The wall-mount bracket attaches to the wall, and the BCM50 unit connects to the wall-mount bracket. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you need a wall-mount bracket for each unit. Each wall-mount bracket includes a cable-management tray that you use to store and organize the cables connected to the BCM50 units. An optional wiring field card simplifies the cable connections for the lines and extensions. If desired you can install an optional plywood backboard 2 cm (3/4 in.) thick.

Caution: For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM50, see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 77.

Caution: You must mount BCM50 units side-by-side on the wall. DO NOT attempt to mount units on top of each other when using the wall-mount option.

Caution: To keep the BCM50 operating at the optimal internal temperature, keep the top, sides, and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment.

Use the following procedures to install the BCM50 unit on a wall: To install the BCM50 wall-mount bracket on page 86 To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 88

To install the BCM50 wall-mount bracket

1 Use a pencil to mark the location of the plywood backboard on the wall. Use a ruler and a level to make sure that the plywood backboard is level. Note: Nortel recommends the use of a plywood backboard to simplify installing multiple BCM50 units. However, due to the compact size and light weight of the BCM50 units, a backboard is not required. If you do not use a backboard, use the appropriate wall anchors or ensure the screws are in a stud. 2 3 Mount the plywood backboard securely to the wall. Place the wall-mount bracket on the backboard and mark the location of the center keyhole-shaped screw hole on the plywood backboard. See the figure Wall-mount bracket on page 87.

NN40020-302

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

87

Figure 38 Wall-mount bracket

1 2 2 1 2 1
Attach the wall-mount bracket with 5 screws: Two screws mount through the cable trough (open the cable-management door). Three screws mount as shown in the figure.

Note: When you use three screws, Nortel recommends installing the screws in the three holes labeled 1 or the three holes labeled 2.

Prepare the wall-mount bracket by removing the alignment tabs: If this is the only unit in the BCM50 system, remove the alignment tabs on the right side of the wall-mount bracket. If this is the last unit on a BCM50 system with multiple units, remove the alignment tabs on the left side of the wall-mount bracket.

Place the additional wall-mount bracket on the backboard on the right side of the existing wall-mount bracket. Use the alignment tabs to ensure the two wall-mount brackets are properly aligned. If these options do not meet your requirements, other options are available. For example, you can route the Amphenol connector cable to the left of the unit, or you can route the cable straight down the wall. 5 Attach the wall-mount bracket with five #8 x 2 cm (#8 x 0.75 in.) round-head wood screws: a b c d e f Install one screw in the backboard. Do not tighten the screw head against the backboard. Leave approximately 0.5 cm (0.25 in.) of the screw exposed from the backboard. Hang the wall-mount bracket on the mounting screw. Use a level to make sure the wall-mount bracket is level. Install two screws into the screw holes in the wall-mount bracket. See the figure Wall-mount bracket on page 87. Tighten the wood screws against the wall-mount bracket. Open the cable-management door.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

88

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

g 6

Install two screws into the screw holes in the cable trough.

If the BCM50 system has only one unit, go to the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 88. If the BCM50 system has more than one unit, repeat steps 3 to 6 for each wall-mount bracket. Go to the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 88.

To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket

1 2 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit. Slide the wall-mount lock fully to the right (unlock position). See the figure Wall-mount lock in unlock position on page 88.

Figure 39 Wall-mount lock in unlock position

Align the feet on the BCM50 unit with the four holes in the wall-mount bracket. See the figure Attach the BCM50 unit to the wall-mount bracket on page 89.

NN40020-302

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

89

Figure 40 Attach the BCM50 unit to the wall-mount bracket

4 5

Press the unit against the wall-mount bracket and slide the unit down until it clicks in place. Slide the wall-mount lock to the left (lock position). See the figure Wall-mount lock in lock position on page 89.

Figure 41 Wall-mount lock in lock position

6 7 8

Use the supplied screw to secure the wall-mount lock in position. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each additional BCM50 unit you install. Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 92.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

90

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

Installing the wiring field card (optional)

Install the optional wiring field card (WFC) in the cable-management tray of the main unit.

To install the WFC

1 2 3 Clear the WFC installation area of all cables. Place the WFC in the installation area with the 50-pin header at the top. Slide the WFC down until it is at the bottom of the installation area and held in place by the three clips. See the figure Slide in the WFC on page 90.

Figure 42 Slide in the WFC

Press the WFC firmly at the top left corner, center, and right tabs. The WFC snaps into place. See the figure Snap the WFC into place on page 90.

Figure 43 Snap the WFC into place

5 6

OptionalInstall the three screws to secure the WFC in place. Continue with the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) on page 117.

NN40020-302

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

91

Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf

To mount a BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf, attach the supplied rubber feet to the bottom of the unit. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you can set the additional units beside, or stack them on top of, the first unit. If you are mounting the additional units beside the first unit, attach the supplied rubber feet to the bottom of each unit. If you are stacking the additional units on top of the first unit, mount each unit into the tabs on top of another unit. Caution: For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM50 system, see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 77.

Note: To keep the BCM50 unit operating at the optimal internal temperature, keep the top, sides, and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment. Place no objects, except another BCM50 unit or a power supply mounting enclosure, on top of the main unit.

To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf

To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf: 1 2 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit. Attach the four self-adhesive rubber feet to the bottom of the BCM50 unit by peeling off the paper backing and placing the feet on the unit as indicated in the figure Location for feet on the bottom of the BCM50 unit on page 91.

Figure 44 Location for feet on the bottom of the BCM50 unit

Attach feet here

Position the BCM50 unit on a table or shelf. Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

92

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

If the BCM50 system has additional units, you can install the other units on top of, or beside, the existing BCM50 unit. To install the additional units beside the existing unit, repeat steps 1 to 3 for each unit. To install the additional units on top of the existing unit, see the procedure To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit on page 85.

Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 92.

Installing the BCM50 power supply

There are several different ways to install a power supply. Select the method that works best for your type of installation. The power supply must be within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the BCM50 unit and within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the AC power outlet (wall outlet or UPS). Note: Do not stack more than one BCM50 unit or power supply mounting enclosure on top of a first unit.

For a rackmount installation you can install the power supply directly onto the rackmount shelf or you can use the power supply mounting enclosure. For a wallmount installation, you can use the power supply mounting enclosure (for up to three power supplies) or a single power supply mounting bracket (for a single power supply). For a desktop installation, you can mount them directly to the desk or you can use the power supply mounting enclosure (for up to three power supplies).

To install the power supply on the rack-mount shelf

1 Place the power supply behind the BCM50 units on the back of the rack-mount shelf. Make sure the power supply is on its side with the label facing the back of the shelf. 2 3 Use two cable ties to secure the power supply to the rack-mount shelf. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each power supply you mount.

NN40020-302

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

93

To install the power supply on the desktop

1 Place the power supply next to the BCM50 unit on the desktop. The power supply must be within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the BCM50 unit and within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the AC power outlet (wall outlet or UPS).

To install a power supply using the power supply mounting enclosure

1 2 Slide the BCM50 power supplies into the power supply mounting enclosure. Mount the power supply mounting enclosure in the same manner as your other BCM50 units (in a rack, on a wall, or on a destop).

For more detailed installation instructions for the power supply mounting enclosure, see the Nortel BCM50 Power Supply Mounting Enclosure (N0118043).

To install a power supply using the single power supply mounting bracket
1 2 3 If you want to install one power supply only, use the single power supply mounting bracket. Attach the single power supply mounting bracket on the wall next to your BCM50 system. Snap the power supply into the power supply mounting bracket.

For more detailed installation instructions for the power supply mounting bracket, see the Nortel BCM50 Single Power Supply Mounting Bracket (N0130867).

Next step
If you install an expansion unit, proceed to Installing an expansion unit on page 95. Otherwise, proceed to Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 103.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

94

Chapter 7 Installing the main unit

NN40020-302

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

95

Chapter 8
Installing an expansion unit
Adding an expansion unit increases the capacity of your BCM50 system by providing a method of adding a media bay module (MBM). Each MBM you add increases the number of public switched telephone network (PSTN) trunks or extensions that you can connect to the BCM50 system. The figure Overview of installing a expansion unit on page 95 shows the steps required to install the expansion unit.
Figure 45 Overview of installing a expansion unit

Installation and Maintenance Guide

96

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

For information about installing an expansion unit: Unpacking the expansion unit on page 96 Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96 Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 100 Installing the expansion unit on page 101

Unpacking the expansion unit

Open the expansion unit box and remove all the components. Check that the box contains the following components: one expansion unit one expansion unit power supply one power supply cable one expansion cable (shielded Ethernet cable) one power supply retention clip four rubber feet

Visually inspect the components for damage during shipping. If you find damage, contact your Nortel representative.

Warning: Make sure the power supply to the expansion unit is disconnected before inserting or removing an MBM.

Verifying the media bay module switch settings

Each MBM has dip switches on the back or underside of the module. See the figure Switches on the media bay module (not applicable for GASM or GATM) on page 97.

NN40020-302

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

97

Figure 46 Switches on the media bay module (not applicable for GASM or GATM)

Underside of MBM

6 5 4 3 2 1

Off

On

On dip switches Back of MBM Off

1 2 3 4 5 6

Top of MBM

Rear view of MBM

Note: The GASM and GATM MBMs have a dip switch configuration different from that shown in the figure Switches on the media bay module (not applicable for GASM or GATM) on page 97. For more information, see the procedure To set GASM dip switches on page 98 and the procedure To set GATM dip switches on page 99. Verify that the dip switches for your MBMs are in the default factory positions. If you install a DTM, ADID4, ADID8, BRIM, 4x16, DSM16, DSM32, or ASM8, ensure that all the switches are on, which is the default setting for the MBM switches. After you set the switches, proceed to Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 100.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

98

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

To set G4x16 or G8x16 dip switches

1 2 Set the Module Select dip switches to on (up). See the figure G4x16/G8x16 dip switch location on page 98. Set the Mode/Country Select dip switches to off (down); this setting allows the MBM to automatically download the country profile settings.

Figure 47 G4x16/G8x16 dip switch location

Rear of MBM

ON OFF

123456

12345678

ON OFF

Module Select

Mode/Country Select

For information about line and DN settings, see the table G4x16/G8x16 lines and DNs settings on page 98.
Table 17 G4x16/G8x16 lines and DNs settings Expansion unit
1 2 Module 05 07

Card
01 01

Lines
065-068 (G4X16) 065-072 (G8x16) 095-098 (G4X16) 095-102 (G8X16)

DNs
253-268 285-300

To set GASM dip switches

1 2 For the dip switches on the left side at the rear of the module, set all switches to on. For the dip switches on the right side at the rear of the module, set the switches according to the table GASM dip switch settings (switch 13) on page 98 and the table GASM dip switch settings (switch 48) on page 99.

Table 18 GASM dip switch settings (switch 13)

Switch Switch 1 Description Firmware download capability Setting OFFStandard mode (firmware downloading not supported) ONEnhanced mode (firmware downloading supported) OFFif you want the GASM to download the firmware when the firmware version in the BCM50 is different from the version in the GASM (default) ONif you want the GASM to download the firmware whenever a cold start is performed for the BCM50 OFFEnables echo cancellation (default) ONDisables echo cancellation

Switch 2

Set when the firmware is downloaded from the BCM50 (for enhanced mode only)

Switch 3

Enable or disable echo cancellation

NN40020-302

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

99

Table 19 GASM dip switch settings (switch 48)

Switches 4 to 8 select the region for the GASM as follows: Switch 4 North America United Kingdom Australia Poland OFF OFF OFF OFF Switch 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF Switch 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF Switch 7 OFF OFF ON ON Switch 8 OFF ON OFF ON

After you set the switches, proceed to Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 100.

To set GATM dip switches

1 2 3 For the dip switches on the left side at the rear of the module, set all switches to on. For the dip switches on the right side at the rear of the module (country profile switches), set all switches to off. The GATM downloads the country profiles automatically. After you set the switches, proceed to Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 100.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

100

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit

Warning: Risk of shock. Only qualified telecommunications service personnel are permitted to service this equipment. Ensure the BCM system is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening. The MBMs have been safety-approved for installation into the BCM system. It is the responsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation of the hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals or local electrical code regulations for telecommunications equipment and wiring installation. Do not connect the digital station ports of the DSM16+, DSM32+, or Combination MBMs to the PSTN. Only approved digital phone sets or peripheral devices can connect to the DSM16+, DSM32+, and Combination MBMs.

Warning: Digital Station ports DSM16+, DSM32+, and Analog Station ports GASM8 must not be connected to exposed plant. This includes Digital Station ports residing on the Combination MBMs G4x16 and G8x16. Use only proprietary Nortel Digital Station Sets for connection to digital ports and agency approved Analog devices for connection to the Analog Station ports. The digital station ports of the Combination MBMs must not be connected to exposed plant Follow this procedure to install a media bay module (MBM).

To install an MBM
1 2 3 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. With the face of the MBM toward you, insert the MBM into the expansion unit. Push the MBM completely into the expansion unit. You hear a click when the MBM is firmly seated in the expansion unit. The MBM must be configured for it to function. For information about configuring an MBM, see the procedure To configure the MBM(s) on page 156. 4 Proceed with Installing the expansion unit on page 101.

NN40020-302

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

101

Installing the expansion unit

Make sure that the expansion unit is installed close enough to the main unit so that the supplied expansion cable can be connected between the expansion unit and main unit. The expansion unit can be mounted in a rack, on a wall, or on a desktop. Typically, the expansion unit is mounted in the same way as the main unit. Use one of the following procedures to mount the expansion unit: Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 82 Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 86 Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 91

Next step
If you install a second expansion unit on the system, repeat the procedures in this section for the second expansion unit. After you install the expansion unit, proceed to Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 103.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

102

Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

103

Chapter 9
Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
This section describes how to connect the telephone lines, telephony devices, and power to the BCM50 system. The figure Overview of connecting cables to the BCM50 system on page 103 shows the steps required to connect the cables to the BCM50 system.
Figure 48 Overview of connecting cables to the BCM50 system

Installation and Maintenance Guide

104

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

For information about connecting the cables to the BCM50 system: Connecting the expansion unit on page 104 Connecting the power supply on page 106 Connecting the lines and extensions on page 108 Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 113

Connecting the expansion unit

The expansion unit connects to the main unit through the expansion ports on the front of the units. The figure Expansion ports on page 104 shows the location of the expansion ports on the BCM50 main unit and the expansion unit.
Figure 49 Expansion ports

Main unit

Expansion/LAN (port 2)

Expansion/LAN (port 3)

Expansion unit

Expansion port

Note: The expansion unit connected to expansion/LAN port 2 on the main unit is designated as Expansion 1 in Element Manager, while the expansion unit connected to expansion/LAN port 3 is designated as Expansion 2. Use this information to configure the correct media bay module (MBM) in Element Manager (see Configuring the media bay module on page 156).

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

105

If your BCM50 system does not have an expansion unit, proceed to Connecting the power supply on page 106.

To connect an expansion unit

Note: Keycodes are required for the expansion ports to function. If you purchase a keycode for one expansion port only, expansion/LAN port 2 (on the left) is active.

Locate the expansion cable supplied with the expansion unit. If have no expansion cable, you can use a shielded category 5e-compliant Ethernet cable (maximum length of 10 m). Plug one end of the expansion cable into the expansion port on the expansion unit. Perform one of the following tasks (see the figure Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 105): To connect the first expansion unit: Plug the other end of the expansion cable into expansion/LAN port 2 on the main unit. This expansion unit is now designated as Expansion 1 in Element Manager. To connect the second expansion unit: Plug the other end of the expansion cable into expansion/LAN port 3 on the main unit. This expansion unit is now designated as Expansion 2 in Element Manager.

2 3

Note: When you plug an expansion unit into the correct port on the main unit, the LEDs on the expansion unit port light, while the LEDs on the main unit port turn off.
Figure 50 Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit
Expansion unit 1 Main unit Expansion unit 2

Buses 5/6

Buses 7/8

Installation and Maintenance Guide

106

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

The expansion port you select determines the line and extension numbers of the devices connected to the expansion unit. For the default line and extension numbers, see the table Default line and extension numbers on page 106. If you have a second expansion unit, repeat steps 1 to 3 for the second unit.
Table 20 Default line and extension numbers
Default extension numbers* Main unit Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 Digital: 221232 Analog: 233236 237268 269300 Default line numbers* 061064 065094 095124

* The number and type of lines and extensions that are available on the expansion ports are determined by the MBM you install in the expansion unit.

Connecting the power supply

An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is an optional device that you connect to your BCM50 system. The UPS provides battery backup for the BCM50 system to maintain continuous operation during a power interruption or failure. For more information about the UPS, see Uninterruptable power supply on page 55. When connecting a UPS, you must use a USB hub between the UPS and the BCM50 system.

Note: For the UPS to function correctly, you must first connect it before you power up the BCM50 system. If you connect a UPS to a running system, the UPS does not function.

Note: International (non-North American) users require the power supply adapter cord to connect the power supply to the special power bar. For more information, see Power supply adapter cord (international users) on page 55. The figure Connect a UPS on page 107 shows how to connect the UPS.

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

107

Figure 51 Connect a UPS

Main unit UPS

USB hub

USB cable Power supply

If your BCM50 system does not have a UPS, continue with the procedure To connect a power supply without a UPS on page 107.

To connect a power supply using a UPS

1 Mount the UPS within 1.5 meters (5 ft.) of the BCM50 units. The UPS must be close enough to the BCM50 units that you can connect the power supply to both the UPS and the BCM50 units. Plug one end of the USB cable into the USB port on the UPS. For information about the location of the ports on the UPS, see the UPS documentation. Plug the other end of the USB cable into the USB hub. Plug one end of the second USB cable into the USB hub. Plug the other end of the second USB cable into the USB port on the main unit. Plug the UPS power cord into the AC power source (wall outlet). Proceed to Connecting the lines and extensions on page 108.

2 3 4 5 6 7

To connect a power supply without a UPS

1 2 Unpack the new power supply. Check the power supply for damage. If you find damage, contact your Nortel representative. Warning: Do not use the power supply if the power supply cord or power supply cable is damaged. 3 4 Rotate the retention clip so the power outlet is open. Plug the power supply cord into the BCM50 unit. Note: Use only the power supply that is approved by Nortel for use with the BCM50 units.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

108

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

5 6 7 8

Rotate the retention clip so that it locks the power supply cord in place. Plug one end of the power supply cable into the power supply. Plug the other end of the power supply cable into the AC power source (wall outlet). Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each BCM50 unit. Warning: Leakage currents You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the telephony and data networking cables.

Proceed to Connecting the lines and extensions on page 108.

Connecting the lines and extensions

The telephone lines and extensions connect to the BCM50 system through an RJ-21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit and to the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion units. You can also use the optional wiring field card (WFC) to simplify the connection of the lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector in a wall-mount or desktop-mount installation. For rack-mount installations you can use the optional rack-mount patch panel. For information about connecting lines and extensions: Wiring warnings on page 109 Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector on page 110 Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units on page 111 Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 112 To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) on page 117

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

109

Wiring warnings
Read the following warnings before you connect any telephone lines or extensions to the BCM50 system. Warning: Electrical shock warning The MBMs are safety approved for installation into the expansion unit. The installer and user must ensure that installation of the hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals. BEFORE YOU OPEN the main unit or expansion unit, ensure that the network telecommunication cables are unplugged and the unit is disconnected from the AC power source. Station modules: Connect the ports on these modules only to approved digital telephones and peripherals with the proper cables on a protected internal wiring system. Do not connect telephones to wiring that extends to the outside of the building. Read and follow the installation instructions carefully.

Warning: Use only qualified persons to service the system. Service personnel with the appropriate training and experience must perform the installation and service of this unit. Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring. They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage. Warning: Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power-line fault events on network lines. These leakage currents normally flow safely to protective earth ground through the power cord. However, if the AC power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the BCM50 units, this hazard can occur. System shutdown: You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet. System startup: You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the telephony and data networking cables.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

110

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

Danger: Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and AC mains are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, you must connect the BCM50 system to an outlet with a third-wire ground. In addition, all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed. The covers on all units must be in place after servicing.

Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector

You can connect 4 analog lines, 4 analog extensions, and 12 digital extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector. If you use the WFC to connect the lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector, see Installing the wiring field card (optional) on page 90 and the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) on page 117. Warning: If you use the same phone line for both an analog trunk and a DSL line, you must install a DSL filter on the analog trunk to avoid interference with the DSL modem.

To connect the lines and extensions

1 2 3 Read the warnings in Wiring warnings on page 109. Obtain a 25-pair cable with an RJ-21 connector on one end. Remove the appropriate side breakout from the cable-management door: 4 5 If this is the first unit on a BCM50 system with multiple units, remove the side breakout from the right side of the cable-management door. If this is the center unit on a BCM50 system with more than two units, remove the side breakout from both sides of the cable-management door.

Plug the RJ-21 connector into the RJ-21 telephony connector on the main unit. Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ-21 connector to the main unit: If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it. If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the main unit.

6 7 8

Connect the four pairs of wires for the analog lines to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building. Connect the four pairs of wires for the analog telephones to the local connecting blocks. Connect the 12 pairs of wires for the digital telephones to the local connecting blocks.

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

111

Select the appropriate option for your system: If your BCM50 system has an expansion unit, proceed to Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units on page 111 or Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 112. If your BCM50 system has no expansion unit, proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 113.

For detailed information about wiring the RJ-21 telephony connector, see RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 207.

Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units

Telephone lines connect to the expansion unit through the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion unit.

To connect telephone lines to DTM, BRIM, or 4x16 MBMs

1 2 Read the warnings in Wiring warnings on page 109. Obtain a telephone cable that has a modular plug that matches the MBM to which you are connecting: 3 4 5 RJ-48Cfor DTM RJ-45for BRIM RJ-11for 4x16

Plug the modular cable into the jack in the front of the MBM. Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building. If you connect telephone lines to a 4x16 or BRIM, repeat steps 2 to 4 for each line. Warning: If the network ISDN is a U-loop, you must connect the BRIM only to an NT1 provided by the service provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV) to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.

Note: Do not attempt to plug digital equipment into the auxiliary (AUX) jacks on the front of 4x16 MBM. 6 Select the appropriate option for your system: If you connect a 4x16 MBM, go to Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 112 for instruction about wiring the extensions for this MBM. If your BCM50 system has another expansion unit, repeat this procedure if you add more telephone lines, or proceed to Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 112 if you add extensions.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

112

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

If your BCM50 system has no other expansion unit, proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 113.

To connect analog telephone lines to the GATM4/GATM8 or G4x16/G8x16

1 2 3 Read the warnings in Wiring warnings on page 109. Obtain a 25-pair cable with an RJ-21 connector on one end. Plug the RJ-21 connector of the cable into the RJ-21 connector on the front of the MBM. Use the lower RJ-21 connector on the G4x16/G8x16 MBMs to connect analog lines. 4 Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ-21 connector to the MBM: If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it. If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the MBM.

5 6

Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building. Select the appropriate option for your system: If your BCM50 system has another expansion unit, repeat this procedure if you add more telephone lines, or proceed to Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 112 if you add extensions. If your BCM50 system has no other expansion unit, proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 113.

For information about wiring the trunk MBMs: DTM wiring chart on page 219 BRIM wiring chart on page 221 GATM wiring chart on page 225 4x16 wiring charts on page 229 G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts on page 233

Connecting extensions to the expansion units

Extensions connect to the expansion unit through the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion unit.

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

113

To connect extensions to DSM16, DSM32, ASM8, 4x16, G4x16, or G8x16 MBMs

1 2 3 Read the warnings in the Wiring warnings on page 109 section. Obtain a 25-pair cable with an RJ-21 connector on one end. Plug the RJ-21 connector of the cable into the RJ-21 connector on the front of the MBM. Use the upper RJ-21 connector on the G4x16/G8x16 MBMs to connect digital extensions. 4 Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ-21 connector to the MBM: If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it. If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the MBM.

5 6 7

Connect the other end of the cable to the local connecting blocks. If you connect extensions to a DSM32, repeat steps 2 to 5 for the second RJ-21 connector. Select the appropriate option for your system: If your BCM50 system has another expansion unit, repeat this procedure if you add more extensions, or proceed to Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units on page 111 if you add telephone lines. If your BCM50 system has no other expansion unit, proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 113.

For information about wiring the station MBMs: 4x16 wiring charts on page 229 G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts on page 233 DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts on page 237 ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart on page 241

Connecting the auxiliary equipment

The main unit has connections for an auxiliary ringer, an external paging system, and a music source. You can connect this auxiliary equipment through the auxiliary terminal block on the wiring field card (WFC) or the patch panel. See the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) on page 117 or the procedure To connect the cables to the patch panel (optional) on page 117. For information about connecting auxiliary equipment: Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 114 Connecting an external paging system on page 114 Connecting an external music source on page 115

Installation and Maintenance Guide

114

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

Connecting an auxiliary ringer

An auxiliary ringer is a customer-supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing capability to telephones on the BCM50 system.

To install an auxiliary ringer

1 2 Use the installation instructions supplied with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary ringer. Connect the ringer generator to the auxiliary ringer output pair on the RJ-21 telephony connector. To determine which pair of wires to use for the auxiliary ringer, see RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 207. Warning: You must not connect auxiliary ringer to unprotected plant wiring. The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40 V DC source. 3 Select the appropriate option for your system: If you add more auxiliary equipment, proceed to Connecting an external paging system on page 114 or Connecting an external music source on page 115. When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to Next step on page 118.

Connecting an external paging system

You can connect a customer-supplied external paging system to provide paging over external loudspeakers. Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines: The paging output from the main unit is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600 . The output level is 0 dBm0 with reference to 600 ohms for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm. There is no DC voltage across the page output terminals.

When you use the page signal output to connect an external paging amplifier, you also use the page relay output that contains a floating relay contact pair. The system uses this output to control the external paging amplifier. The contact pair for the page relay output has a switch capacity of 50 mA (non inductive) at 40 V (maximum).

To install an external paging system

1 2 Use the installation instructions supplied with the external paging hardware to install the external paging system. Connect the paging system audio input to the page output on the RJ-21 telephony connector. To determine which pair of wires to use for the page output, see RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 207.

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

115

Connect the paging system relay to the page relay output on the RJ-21 telephony connector. To determine which pair of wires to use for the page relay output, see RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 207. Warning: You must connect the paging connections to unprotected telephony plant wiring.

Tip: Paging tips External paging does not support talk back paging equipment unless you use an external line port. The BCM50 system provides paging over the telephone speakers when no external paging equipment is available. 4 Select the appropriate option for your system: If you add more auxiliary equipment, proceed to Connecting an external music source on page 115 or Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 114. When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to Next step on page 118.

Connecting an external music source

Use this procedure to connect an external music source to the BCM50 system. You can use any customer-supplied, approved, low-power device as a music source. A music source includes equipment such as a radio with a high-impedance earphone jack. For information about connecting an external music source: Music source specifications on page 115 To connect the music source using the music source jack on page 116 To connect the music source using the RJ-21 telephony connector on page 116

Music source specifications

Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines: Nominal input impedance is 3.3 kilohms. Nominal sensitivity of this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is 22 dBm0 for a 0.25 V rms input signal. The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network does not exceed 12 dBm when averaged over any three-second interval. The maximum non clipped input level is 1 V rms. The interface is protected against ringing cross.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

116

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

The music source jack is on the front of the main unit. If you use the music source jack to connect the music source, do not connect a music source to the music source pair on the RJ-21 telephony connector.

To connect the music source using the music source jack

1 Connect the miniature jack of the music source output (3.5 mm mono audio jack) to the music source input on the BCM50 main unit. See the figure Music source jack on page 116.

Figure 52 Music source jack

Music jack
(3.5 mm mono audio jack)

BCM50

Music source input

Tip Sleeve Tip: Music signal Ring: No connection Sleeve: Ground

Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by placing a call and putting it on hold, and then adjust the volume at the music source. Tip: You can adjust the background music volume at every telephone.

Select the appropriate option for your system: If you add more auxiliary equipment, see Connecting an external paging system on page 114 or Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 114. When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to Next step on page 118.

To connect the music source using the RJ-21 telephony connector

Note: If you use the RJ-21 telephony connector to connect the music source, do not connect a music source to the music source jack on the front of the main unit. 1 Connect the music source output to the music source input on the RJ-21 telephony connector. To determine which pair of wires to use for the music source input, see RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 207. Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by placing a call and putting it on hold, and then adjust the volume at the music source.

NN40020-302

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

117

Tip: You can adjust the background music volume at every telephone.

Select the appropriate option for your system: If you add more auxiliary equipment, proceed to Connecting an external paging system on page 114 or Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 114. When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to Next step on page 118.

To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional)

1 Plug the RJ-21 end of the cable assembly into the RJ-21 telephony connector. The cable is now permanently connected to the RJ-21 telephony connector. 2 Remove the terminal block from the WFC: a b Slide a small flat screwdriver into the rectangular opening at the back of the terminal block. Pry the terminal block so the top rotates forward and the block comes free.

Make the connections to the terminal block while it is removed from the header. 3 4 5 6 7 Use a small slotted screwdriver to unscrew the wire hole screws on top of the terminal block. Insert the bare wire ends (6 mm or 0.25 in.) in the appropriate holes on the sides of the terminal block. Tighten the screws to hold the wires in place. Reinstall the terminal block on the header of the WFC. Connect the remaining wires (digital telephones, analog telephones, and analog trunks) to the WFC. The eight-pin modular jacks on the WFC accept RJ-45 or RJ-11 modular plugs. 8 Connect cables to the main unit as required.

To connect the cables to the patch panel (optional)

1 2 Plug the RJ-21 end of the cable assembly into the RJ-21 telephony connector. Plug the other end of the cable assembly into the patch panel header. The cable locks in place. 3 Remove the terminal block from the patch panel: a b Slide a small flat screwdriver into the rectangular opening at the back of the terminal block. Pry the terminal block so the top rotates forward and the block comes free.

Make the connections to the terminal block while it is removed from the header.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

118

Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system

4 5 6 7 8 9

Use a small slotted screwdriver to unscrew the wire hole screws on top of the terminal block. Insert the bare wire ends (6 mm or 0.25 in.) in the appropriate holes on the sides of the terminal block. Tighten the screws to hold the wires in place. Reinstall the terminal block on the patch panel. Connect the wires (digital telephones, analog telephones, and analog trunks) to the patch panel. Connect cables to the main unit as required.

Next step
After you connect the cables to the BCM50 system, you can configure the initial parameters. For information about configuring these parameters, see Installing telephones and peripherals on page 119.

NN40020-302

119

Chapter 10
Installing telephones and peripherals
This section describes how to install telephones and peripherals. You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system. Which station media bay module (MBM) you use determines your telephone configuration. When you initialize the BCM50, it creates default settings for telephone DN records. The settings are based on which telephony profile you chose. To change these settings, use the Element Manager application. Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through Element Manager are in the Device Configuration Guide (NN40020-300).

Note: For detailed information about installing various telephones and peripherals, see the documentation for your particular telephone or peripheral.

Note: Programming occurs on the telephone when the BCM50 system recognizes the telephone on the system. For information about installing telephones and peripherals: System telephones on page 119 Installing an emergency telephone on page 120 Installing IP phones on page 120

System telephones
The BCM50 system supports a number of analog, digital, IP telephony, and cordless telephones. For more information on supported telephones, see the Telephony Device Installation Guide (NN40020-309). Analog telephones are supported either through the analog station ports on the main unit, analog station MBMs (ASM), or by connecting to a digital module through an analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2). Each piece of equipment has documentation describing installation and telephone features.

Analog terminal adapter 2

The analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to a digital station connector on the BCM50 system.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

120

Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals

For the requirements and procedure to install the device, see Installing the analog terminal adapter on page 121.

Installing an emergency telephone

You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when no power is available to the BCM50 system. Emergency telephone will work if it is connected to CSC 1.0 hardware, however it will not work with later hardware versions. Emergency telephone will work only if it is connected to expansion unit with a caller ID trunk module (CTM) or a global analog trunk module (GATM) on the CSC 1.0 (Indicated by telegraph pole label) and providing first line and first analog set. To install an emergency telephone on the BCM50 system, connect a single-line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM/GATM. When you make a call from the emergency telephone, the auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the line 1 port of the CTM or GATM. You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your BCM50 system.

To install the emergency telephone

1 2 3 Connect a single-line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM or GATM. Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the line 1 port of the CTM or GATM. On the main unit (if CSC 1.0): Connect a single-line analog telephone to the first analog station port on the main unit (pins 30 + 5 / i.e. White-Slate & Slate-White) Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the first line port on the main unit (pins 26 + 1 / i.e. white-blue & blue-white).

Installing IP phones
You can set the system to automatically assign DNs to the IP Phones. The autoassign feature assigns DNs in the configured IP DN range. If you choose to manually assign DNs, choose DNs in the assigned DN range. Ensure that the DN type in each DN record is set to IP telephony. For details about configuring DN records for the IP telephones, see the Telephony Device Installation Guide (NN40020-309).

NN40020-302

121

Chapter 11
Installing the analog terminal adapter
This section provides installation instructions for the analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) or ATA. The ATA2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the BCM50 system through a digital station module. Examples of analog voice devices are analog telephones and answering machines. Examples of analog data communication devices are modems and fax machines. The ATA2 is designated as either an ONS (on-premise station) or an OPS (off-premise station) port. For information about installing an ATA2: Configuration overview on page 121 Installing the ATA2 on page 122 Configuring the ATA2 on page 125

For ATA2 specifications, see the table ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications on page 51.

Configuration overview
This section describes environment configurations for connecting analog and data devices to the main unit using an ATA2: Analog telephone on page 121 Analog data device on page 122

Analog telephone
The figure Analog telephone installation overview on page 121 shows an installation overview for connecting an analog device through an ATA2 to the main unit.
Figure 53 Analog telephone installation overview
ATA2 power cord BCM50 Analog telephone

ATA2

Line loop resistance: 135 ohms maximum

Terminal loop resistance: 1300 ohms maximum

Installation and Maintenance Guide

122

Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter

Analog data device

The ATA2 connects a standard analog data device, such as a fax or modem, to the BCM50 system. The figure Data communication device installation overview on page 122 shows an installation overview for connecting a data communication device through an ATA2 to the BCM50 system.
Figure 54 Data communication device installation overview
ATA2 power cord BCM50 Data communication device

ATA2

Line loop resistance: 135 ohms maximum

Terminal loop resistance: 200 ohms maximum

Installing the ATA2

This section provides information about installing the ATA2: Connecting the ATA2 on page 122 Mounting the ATA2 on page 123 Test insertion loss measurement on page 124

Connecting the ATA2

After you set up the correct environment, connect the BCM50 system and the analog device to the ATA2, and then connect the power. See the figure ATA2 top view on page 122.
Figure 55 ATA2 top view

24 V 0.006 A

= jack Line

Terminal jack

Power supply connector receptacle

The figure ATA2 pin outs on page 123 shows the pinouts for the connection cables.

NN40020-302

Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter

123

Figure 56 ATA2 pin outs

Line jack TCM* TCM* Terminal jack Ring (B-Lead) Tip (A-Lead)

* The TCM input is not polarity sensitive.

To connect the ATA2

1 2 3 4 5 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 terminal jack. Connect the other end to your telephone, modem, or fax. Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 line jack. Connect the other end to an available station port on the BCM50 system. For a 120 V or 230 V system, plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power supply connector receptacle. Plug the adapter into a standard AC outlet.

Caution: In North America, the ATA2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that is UL- and CSA-approved. In Europe, the ATA2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked.

Mounting the ATA2

After the ATA2 is correctly connected, you can mount the unit on a wall as described in this section.

To mount the ATA2 on a wall

1 2 3 4 When using 0.5 mm wire (24-AWG), select a location within 800 m (2600 ft.) of the BCM50. Allow 12.5 cm (5 in.) clearance for the line jack, terminal jack, and power supply connector. Screw two 4-mm (#8) screws into the wall 130 mm (5.25 in.) apart. Leave 6 mm (0.25 in.) of the two screws showing. Align the slots at the back of the ATA2 unit over the screws. Push the unit against the wall. The line jack, terminal jack, and power supply connector must be at the top of the ATA2. See the figure ATA2 back view on page 124.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

124

Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter

Figure 57 ATA2 back view

Mounting keyhole slots

Test insertion loss measurement

The maximum loss for ATA2 to Central Office (CO) configuration must not exceed 10 dB. See the figure Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone on page 124.
Figure 58 Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone
BCM50 ATA2 Analog telephone

Central Office

Cable loss

BCM50 to ATA2 ATA2 to BCM50 10 dB Max Longitudinal balance to ground 50 dB 60 to 4000 Hz With IEEE 4551976 test 3 dB

Overload level

Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and analog device by using standard dial-up test lines with a transmission test set (for example, Hewlett-Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set).

NN40020-302

Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter

125

To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device

1 2 Establish a connection to the 1 mW, 1 kHz, CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2. Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms: 3 4 5 Replace the analog telephone with the test set. Use RECEIVE/600 OHM/HOLD mode on the test set.

Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone or the line drops. Remove the single-line telephone. Measure the 1 kHz tone at the far end of the analog port, where the analog loop ends and where the analog device connects.

Note: The tone must be greater than 10 dB (for example: 9 dB is acceptable).

To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO

1 2 Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2. Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms by: 3 4 5 Replace the analog telephone with the test set. Use TRANSMIT/600 OHM/HOLD mode on the test set.

Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone or the line drops. Remove the analog telephone. Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at 10 dBm, and measure the level at the CO exchange.

Note: The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB (for example, 9 dB is acceptable).

Configuring the ATA2

Configure the ATA2 using Element Manager or Telset Administration. For detailed configuration information, see the Device Configuration Guide (NN40020-300).

Installation and Maintenance Guide

126

Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter

NN40020-302

Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system

127

Chapter 12
Configuring the BCM50 system
This section provides information about configuring the basic BCM50 parameters. You can configure advanced parameters using Element Manager or Telset Administration after the BCM50 system is operational. The figure Overview of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters on page 127 shows an overview of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters.
Figure 59 Overview of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters

For simplicity, you can configure the basic BCM50 parameters in two stages: Initial parameters overview on page 128 Startup parameters overview on page 129

Installation and Maintenance Guide

128

Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system

Initial parameters overview

The initial parameters are the required parameters that you can configure using Telset Administration, Element Manager, or the Startup Profile. See the table Initial parameters on page 128 for a list of the initial parameters.
Table 21 Initial parameters
Parameters Keycode IP address: Obtain dynamically IP address IP subnet mask Default gateway Modem: Enable/disable modem System: Region Telephony startup: Template Start DN Voice mail: Attendant DN UI style Language From Line To Line Number of rings Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile Keycode IP Address

Feature 9*8 > Feature codes Configuration > System > Keycodes Feature 9*8 > IP Address Configuration > System > IP Subsystem

Feature 9*8 > Modem Feature **PROFILE

Configuration > Resources Modem > Dial Up interfaces Administration > Utilities > Reset > Cold Reset Telephony Services Administration > Utilities > Reset > Cold Reset Telephony Services System

Feature **STARTUP

Telephony Startup

Feature 983

Configuration > Voice Mail Startup Applications > Voice Messaging/Contact Center

User account: Feature 9*8 > User Accounts Telset user ID (numeric) Telset password (numeric)

Configuration > Administrator Access > Accounts and Privileges > View by Accounts tab

User Account

NN40020-302

Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system

129

Startup parameters overview

The startup parameters are the remaining required parameters that you cannot configure using Telset Administration. You must configure these parameters using Element Manager or the Startup Profile. See the table Startup parameters on page 129 for a list of the startup parameters.
Table 22 Startup parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Parameters System: System name System: System ID Telset Administration N/A N/A Element Manager Configuration > System > Identification Configuration > System > Keycodes (View ID is set automatically and cannot be changed) Configuration > System > Date and Time Startup Profile System System

Time: Date and Time source NTP server address Date and time Time zone DHCP server: Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router Enable/disable server IP domain name Primary DNS Secondary DNS Default gateway IP Phones: Enable registration Enable global pwd Global pwd Auto-assign DNs Advertisement/Logo SNMP Agent: Enable/disable SNMP agent Minimum security SNMP version support SNMP community: Community string Type of access SNMP manager: Manager IP address

N/A

Time

N/A

Configuration > Data DHCP Server Services > DHCP Server > General Settings tab

N/A

Configuration > Resources IP Telephones > Telephony Resources > IP & Application Sets

N/A

Configuration > Administrator Access > SNMP > General tab

SNMP Agent

N/A

Configuration > Administrator Access > SNMP > Community Strings tab Configuration > Administrator Access > SNMP > General tab

SNMP Community

N/A

SNMP Manager

Installation and Maintenance Guide

130

Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system

Table 22 Startup parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)

Parameters User account: User ID Group Description Callback number Telset Administration N/A Element Manager Configuration > Administrator Access > View by Accounts tab Startup Profile User Account

SRG Main Office: N/A VoIP Trunk Access Code Test Local Mode Timeout Primary Network Connect Server Address Alternate Network Connect Server Address Network Connect Server Port Heartbeat Protocol Port H.323 ID Numbering Plan ID Type of Number Node ID MO Access Code Length

Configuration > Resources SRG Main Office > Survivable Remote Gateway > S1000 Main Office Settings tab

NN40020-302

Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters

131

Chapter 13
Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
You can use Telset Administration through a digital telephone with a two-line display to set the BCM50 configuration parameters. You cannot set all the basic parameters using Telset Administration. Therefore, after configuring the initial parameters, you must use Element Manager to set the startup parameters. See Configuring the startup parameters on page 141. For more information about Telset Administration, see the Telset Administration Guide. The figure Overview of using Telset Administration on page 131 shows an overview of using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters.
Figure 60 Overview of using Telset Administration

Installation and Maintenance Guide

132

Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters

Configuring the initial parameters

Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM50 using Telset Administration: To enter the keycodes on page 132 To configure the IP address on page 133 To configure the modem on page 133 To select the region on page 134 To select the telephony startup template and start DN on page 134 To initialize voice mail on page 134 To create Telset user accounts on page 134

To enter the keycodes

1 2 Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone. Enter the following user ID and password: User ID: SETNNA Password: CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively. 3 4 Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Feature Codes. Press OK. The system ID (SID) displays. 5 6 7 Press NEXT. Enter your sequence ID. Press NEXT to scroll through the list and perform one or both of the following tasks: a b To activate features, select Feature List. Press SHOW to view the available features. Use the soft keys to activate features for your system. To enter a new keycode, select Entitlement Code. Press SHOW to view the current keycode. Use the soft keys to modify the keycode for your system.

For more detailed information about retrieving and entering the keycode for your system, see the Keycode Installation Guide.

NN40020-302

Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters

133

To configure the IP address

1 2 Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone. Enter the following user ID and password: User ID: SETNNA Password: CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively. 3 4 5 6 Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select IP Address. Press OK. Press CHNGE to modify the IP settings. The display screen shows whether DHCP is enabled or disabled. Perform one of the following tasks: a If DHCP is currently enabled: Press DIS to disable DHCP. You can modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway. However, these settings have no effect if the system is disabled. Press IP to modify the following IP settings: IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway If DHCP is currently disabled: Press ENL to enable DHCP. The system must reboot to enable DHCP. Press IP to modify the IP settings. You can modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway. However, these settings have no effect if the system is disabled.

b 7

Press Back to reboot the system.

To configure the modem

1 2 Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone. Enter the following user ID and password: User ID: SETNNA Password: CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively. 3 4 5 Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Modem. Press OK. The display screen shows whether the modem is enabled or disabled. Perform one of the following tasks: a b If the modem is disabled, press ENL to enable the modem. If the modem is enabled, press DIS to disable the modem.

For more information about modem configuration, see the Networking Configuration Guide.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

134

Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters

To select the region

Set the Region using Feature **PROFILE from a two-line display telephone. For information about using Telset Administration to set this parameter, see the Telset Administration Guide.

To select the telephony startup template and start DN

Set the Template and Start DN using Feature **STARTUP from a two-line display telephone. Note: This is available for only 15 minutes after the system starts.

For information about using Telset Administration to set this parameter, see the Telset Administration Guide. Configure other telephony startup parameters using Feature **CONFIG. For more information, see the Telset Administration Guide.

To initialize voice mail

Initialize your voice-mail system using Feature 983 from a two-line display telephone. For information about using Telset Administration to initialize your voice mail system, see the CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide.

To create Telset user accounts

Note: You can create Telset accounts using only Telset Administration. To create Element Manager accounts, you must use Element Manager. 1 2 Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone. Enter the following user ID and password: User ID: SETNNA Password: CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively. 3 4 5 6 7 Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select User Accounts. Press OK. The Accounts screen appears. Press CHNGE to create an account. Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts to create. Press CRT to create the account. If you see the DEL command instead of the CRT command, then the account already exists.

NN40020-302

Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters

135

8 9

Press BACK. The Accounts screen appears. Press NEXT. The password screen appears.

10 Press CHNGE to change the password. 11 Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts. 12 Press CHNGE to change the password for the selected account. 13 Enter the new password for the account. 14 Enter the new password again to confirm it. For more information about creating user accounts using Element Manager, see the procedure To create user accounts on page 146.

Next step
After you configure the initial parameters using Telset Administration, you must configure the startup parameters using Element Manager. For more information, see Configuring the startup parameters on page 141.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

136

Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters

NN40020-302

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

137

Chapter 14
Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
The Element Manager application provides a computer-based client interface that can connect to devices over an IP network and display the programming interface for that device. You can use the latest Element Manager version to manage all previous BCM systems that require Element Manager. You need only one instance of Element Manager on your computer. Through Element Manager, you can configure all of the basic parameters: Configuring the initial parameters on page 139 Configuring the startup parameters on page 141

For more information about using Element Manager, see the Administration Guide. The figure Overview of using Element Manager on page 137 shows an overview of using Element Manager to set the basic parameters.
Figure 61 Overview of using Element Manager

Installation and Maintenance Guide

138

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

Prerequisites
BCM Element Manager has the following system requirements: Windows: Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Vista RAM: minimum 256 MB, recommended 512 MB free space: 150 MB A Citrix server supports access to BCM Element Manager.

Accessing the BCM50 system

After you connect your computer to the BCM50 system, either through the OAM port or through a LAN connection, you can download BCM Element Manager from the Administrator Applications area of the BCM Web page. You can use the latest Element Manager version to manage all previous BCM systems that require Element Manager. You need only one instance of Element Manager on your computer.

To access the BCM50 Web page

1 Open a Web browser and enter the BCM50 system IP address (default is 10.10.10.1). The Enter Network Password dialog box appears. 2 Enter the user name and password (defaults are shown below): User name: nnadmin Password: PlsChgMe! 3 Click OK. The Welcome to BCM Web page appears.

To download and install Element Manager

1 From the Welcome to BCM Web page, click Administrator Applications. The Administrator Applications page appears. 2 From the Administrator Applications page, click Business Element Manager. The Element Manager panel appears. 3 4 Click Download Element Manager on the right side of the screen. When BCM50 Element Manager finishes downloading, double-click the application and follow the installation instructions.

NN40020-302

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

139

To connect to the BCM50 system using Element Manager

1 2 3 4 5 6 Open Element Manager. From the Network menu, select New Network Element, and then select Business Communications Manager. Enter the BCM50 system IP address in the dialog box (default is 10.10.10.1). Click OK. From the Network Elements folder, select the BCM50 system IP address. Enter the following user name and password: User name: nnadmin Password: PlsChgMe! 7 Click Connect. You are now connected to the BCM50 system.

Configuring the initial parameters

Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM50 system using BCM50 Element Manager: To enter a keycode on page 139 To configure the LAN IP address on page 140 To configure the modem on page 140 To configure the startup template for telephony services on page 140 To initialize voice mail on page 141

To enter a keycode
1 2 From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it. Select Keycodes. The Keycodes panel appears. 3 Click Load File. The Open dialog box appears. 4 Select the keycode file for your system, and then click Open.

For details about generating and entering the keycodes for your system, see the Keycode Installation Guide.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

140

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

To configure the LAN IP address

1 2 3 4 From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it. Select IP Subsystem. Select the General Settings tab. It is normally selected by default. From the IP Settings area, click Modify. The Modify IP Settings dialog box appears. 5 Configure the IP Settings attributes. See the table Modify IP Settings attributes on page 140.

Table 23 Modify IP Settings attributes

Attribute Obtain IP address dynamically Description If this is selected, the BCM50 system attempts to use IP address information from a DHCP server. If this is not selected, you must enter values for static IP address, IP subnet mask, and Default gateway. The IP address of the BCM50 system. The subnet mask used by the BCM50 system. The gateway used by the BCM50 system.

IP address IP subnet mask Default gateway

Note: If you modify any of the attributes, then the Element Manager session disconnects.

Click OK.

To configure the modem

1 2 3 From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it. Select Dial Up Interfaces. Select the Enable modem dial-in check box to enable the modem. For more information about modem configuration, see the Networking Configuration Guide.

To configure the startup template for telephony services

Note: This procedure erases all the telephony programming that is currently on the BCM50 system. 1 2 3 From the Administration tab, click the Utilities folder to expand it. Select Reset. Click Cold Reset Telephony Services. The Cold Reset Telephony dialog box appears.

NN40020-302

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

141

Configure the Cold Reset Telephony attributes. See the table Cold Reset Telephony attributes on page 141.

Table 24 Cold Reset Telephony attributes

Attribute Region Template Start DN Description Specify the startup region. Specify the startup template. Specify the startup DN. The default is 221.

Click OK.

To initialize voice mail

1 2 3 From the Configuration tab, click Applications folder to expand it. Select Voice Messaging/Contact Center. Click Launch CallPilot Manager. The Quick Install Wizard form appears. If your voice mail system is already initialized, you do not see the Quick Install Wizard. Instead you see the CallPilot Manager: Main Menu Web page. 4 Configure the attributes on the Quick Install Wizard form.

For more information, see the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide.

Configuring the startup parameters

Use the following procedures to configure the startup parameters for the BCM50 system using Element Manager: To enter a name for your system on page 141 To configure the date and time settings on page 142 To configure DHCP server settings on page 142 To configure IP Phones on page 144 To configure SNMP settings on page 145 To configure SNMP community strings on page 145 To configure the SNMP manager list on page 146 To create user accounts on page 146

To enter a name for your system

1 2 From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it. From the System folder, select Identification.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

142

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

Enter a name for your system in the System name field.

To configure the date and time settings

1 2 From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it. Select Date and Time. The Date and Time panel appears. 3 Configure the Date and Time attributes. See the table Date and Time attributes on page 142.

Table 25 Date and Time attributes

Attribute Date and Time source Description Set to NTP if the system uses a network server to determine the correct time and date. Set to Trunk to receive time and date settings from PSTN (if available). Set to Manual to manually configure the time and date for your system. If Date and Time source is set to NTP, then enter an address for the server. The number of seconds specified to elapse between contacts with the NTP server. 1-XXXX: Number of seconds between contacts with the NTP server. Select whether the NTP security mode is secured or unsecured. The number of discrepancy seconds specified that must occur before the system notifies you of a time difference from the NTP server, if the system automatically checks with the NTP server. ID for accessing the NTP. Control key corresponding to ID for accessing the NTP. Use the calendar to select the correct date and time. Select the time zone for this system.

NTP server address Synch every (s)

NTP security mode Raise alarm if clock differs by at least (s) NTP key ID NTP key string Date and time Time zone

To configure DHCP server settings

Warning: If you have a main unit with an integrated router, you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router to use the DHCP server on the main unit.

1 2 3 4

From the Configuration tab, click the Data Services folder to expand it. Select DHCP Server. Select the General Settings tab. If you have a main unit with an integrated router (BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, BCM50be), do one of the following: Select the Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router check box to use the DHCP server on the integrated router. The DHCP server on the main unit will be disabled.

NN40020-302

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

143

Click Launch Router WebGUI tool to launch the router configuration tool. For information about using the router WebGUI tool, see the Integrated Router Configuration Guide for your product. Clear the Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router check box to use the DHCP server on the main unit. You must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router using the router WebGUI tool. For information about using the router WebGUI tool, see the Integrated Router Configuration Guide for your product. 5 Configure the attributes according to the table DHCP Server: General Settings attributes on page 143.

Table 26 DHCP Server: General Settings attributes

Attribute Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router Description Note: This attribute is available only on main units with an integrated router (BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, BCM50be). Specify whether or not to use the DHCP server on the integrated router. If selected, the DHCP server on the integrated router is used, and the DHCP server on the main unit is disabled. If cleared, the DHCP server on the main unit is active. You must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router to avoid networking conflicts. Select either enable or disable from the list. The domain name of the network. Specify the IP addresses of the primary DNS server in a valid dot format. BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.

DHCP server is IP domain name Primary DNS IP address

Secondary DNS IP address Specify the IP addresses of the secondary DNS server in a valid dot format. BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value. WINS server address Specify the IP address of the WINS server. BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value. Specify a client WINS node type. The BCM50 system automatically sets this value to H-node on all DHCP clients. This setting configures the DHCP client PCs to use P-node name resolution before resorting to B-node name resolution. Note: Use caution if you change this attribute. Specify the IP address of the default next-hop router. BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value. Specify the time, in seconds, for an address assignment until the client lease expires. The default is 259 200 seconds (72 hours).

WINS node type

Default gateway

Lease time

Installation and Maintenance Guide

144

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

To configure IP Phones
1 2 3 From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it. Select Telephony Resources. From the Actual Type column, select IP Sets. The Details for Module area appears in the lower pane with the IP Terminal Global Settings tab as the default. 4 Configure the IP Terminal Global Settings attributes. See the table IP Terminal Global Settings attributes on page 144.

Table 27 IP Terminal Global Settings attributes

Attribute Enable registration Description Select this check box to allow new IP clients to register with the system. WARNING: Remember to clear this check box when you finish registering the new telephones. To require the installer to enter a password when IP telephones are configured and registered to the system, select this box. If this box is not selected (disabled), a valid Telset user ID and password is required to register IP phones. If you select the Enable Global Registration Password check box, enter the password the installer enters on the IP telephone to connect to the system. If this check box is empty, no password prompt occurs during registration. If you select this check box, the system assigns an available DN as an IP terminal requests registration. It does not prompt the installer to enter a set DN. If this check box is empty, the installer receives a prompt to enter the assigned DN during the programming session. Any information in this field appears on the display of all IP telephones. For example, your company name or slogan (24 characters in length).

Enable global registration password

Global password

Auto-assign DNs

Advertisement/Logo

Tip: To automatically configure IP Phones with DNs assigned: 1) Select the Enable registration check box. 2) Select the Enable global registration password check box. 3) Leave the Global password field blank. 4) Select the Auto-assign DNs check box. After the IP Phones are operational, clear the Enable registration check box. You can configure other attributes on the IP Terminal Global Settings tab depending on the requirements for your system.

NN40020-302

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

145

To configure SNMP settings

1 2 3 4 From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it. From the Administrator Access folder, select SNMP. Select the General tab. It is normally selected by default. From the SNMP Settings area, click Modify. The Modify SNMP Settings dialog box appears. 5 Configure the attributes for Modify SNMP Settings. See the table Modify SNMP Settings attributes on page 145.

Table 28 Modify SNMP Settings attributes

Attribute Enable SNMP Agent Minimum required security SNMP Version Support Description Choose whether to enable or disable the SNMP agent by selecting (or not selecting) the check box. Select the minimum required security for SNMP from the list. Select the SMNP version support from the list.

Click OK.

To configure SNMP community strings

1 2 3 4 From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it. From the Administrator Access folder, select SNMP. Select the Community Strings tab. Click Add. The Add Community String dialog box appears. 5 Configure the Add Community String attributes. See the table Add Community String attributes on page 146.

Table 29 Add Community String attributes

Attribute Community string Type of access Description Enter the name used as a key to uniquely identify an individual community entry on the SNMP agent. Specify the read and write access for this community. Available options are Read-Only and Read/Write.

6 7

Click OK. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add more community strings.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

146

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

To configure the SNMP manager list

Use the SNMP manager list to specify IP addresses that can connect to the SNMP agent. 1 2 3 4 From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it. From the Administrator Access folder, select SNMP. Select the General tab. It is normally selected by default. In the SNMP Manager List area, click Add. The Add Manager dialog box appears. 5 6 7 Enter the IP address in the Manager IP Address field. Click OK. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add another manager IP address.

To create user accounts

1 2 3 4 From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it. From the Administrator Access folder, select Accounts and Privileges. Select the View by Accounts tab. Click Add to add a user account. The Add Account dialog box appears. 5 Configure the Add Account attributes. See the table Add Account attributes on page 146.

Table 30 Add Account attributes

Attribute Description User ID Password Telset user ID (numeric) Telset password (numeric) Modem Callback Number Modem Callback Passcode ISDN Callback Number ISDN Callback Passcode Description Enter a description for this account. Enter a descriptive name for the user or the user function. Enter a password for this account. If the user performs administration through the Telset interface, enter a number for the user ID. Enter a password for the Telset User ID. If Callback is required, enter the number to which the system calls back to verify the dial-up user access. This is the code the system uses to confirm the callback is legitimate. If ISDN Callback is required, enter the number to which the system calls back to verify the dial-up user access. This is the code the system uses to confirm that the ISDN callback is legitimate.

Change Password On Login Select this check box to force the user to change the password upon first login. Change Password On Login Select this check box to force the user to change the Telset password upon Telset first login.

NN40020-302

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

147

6 7

Click OK. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to create more user accounts.

To configure SRG
1 2 3 4 From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it. Select Survivable Remote Gateway from the Resources folder. Select the S1000 Main Office Settings tab. Configure the S1000 Main Office Settings attributes. For more information about configuring an SRG system, see the SRG50 Configuration Guide.

Next step
After you set the basic parameters, proceed to Completing the initial installation (optional) on page 155.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

148

Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters

NN40020-302

Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters

149

Chapter 15
Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
An experienced administrator uses the Startup Profile tool to customize a template with common BCM50 parameters. The administrator uses this template to configure a single system or multiple systems. You create the Startup Profile using the Startup Profile template (a Microsoft Excel template). You then use a USB storage device to transfer the Startup Profile data to the BCM50 main unit. Loading the Startup Profile adds approximately 5 minutes to the time for the BCM50 system to boot. After you successfully apply the Startup Profile, the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the BCM50 system configuration. After the BCM50 system reboots, the Startup Profile is fully loaded. The figure Overview of using the Startup Profile on page 149 shows an overview of using the Startup Profile.
Figure 62 Overview of using the Startup Profile

Installation and Maintenance Guide

150

Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters

Note: You must format the USB storage device for the FAT32 file system. If necessary, reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into the USB port of your computer, right-clicking the USB device icon, and selecting FAT32 reformatting. This destroys any data on the USB.

Note: The Startup Profile works only on a BCM50 system with no keycodes loaded. After the keycodes are loaded, the Startup Profile does not work. This condition prevents unintentional overwriting of the parameters of a configured system. For information about setting the initial parameters on the BCM50 system: Startup Profile requirements on page 150 Configuring basic parameters on page 151

Startup Profile requirements

To use the Startup Profile template, you need the following: a computer with a USB port Microsoft Excel 2000 or newer the Nortel BCM50 Startup Profile template (Microsoft Excel template) If you do not have the Startup Profile template on your computer, you can get a copy from the the Nortel support Web site (www.nortel.com/support) or the Administrator Applications page on the main unit. For details about getting the Startup Profile template from the main unit, see the procedure To download the Startup Profile template on page 151. a portable USB storage device compatible with USB 1.1 (formatted for FAT32)

Note: The Startup Profile template uses macros to perform certain functions. You must set your Excel macro security level to medium or low to enable the macros: 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Tools menu, select Macros. Select Security. Select Medium or Low. Exit from Excel. Open the Startup Profile template (in Excel). Enable macros if you are prompted.

NN40020-302

Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters

151

To download the Startup Profile template

1 2 Access the BCM50 Web page (see the procedure To access the BCM50 Web page on page 138). From the Welcome to BCM Web page, click Administrator Applications. The Administrator Applications page appears. 3 From the Administrator Applications page, click Startup Profile Template. The Startup Profile Template panel appears. 4 5 Read the information on this panel. Click Download Startup Profile Template on the right side of the screen, and follow the instructions to download the template.

Configuring basic parameters

To customize a Startup Profile for your system
Note: You cannot copy and paste data between cells in the Startup Profile. If you attempt this, the data validation within the spreadsheet becomes corrupt. If corruption occurs, download another copy of the Startup Profile template from the BCM50 main unit. 1 On a computer with a USB port and Microsoft Excel, open the Startup Profile template (Microsoft Excel template). If you do not have a copy of the Startup Profile template, see the procedure To download the Startup Profile template on page 151. 2 3 4 For instructions about using the Startup Profile template, see the Usage Instructions tab. Click the StartupProfileTemplate tab to begin entering information in the Startup Profile template. Enter your BCM50 system ID in the System ID field in the Startup Profile template. The system ID is on the box of the main unit and on the main unit itself. If you enter the wrong system ID, the Startup Profile does not work with your system. 5 Click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile (.sps file) and a version of the Startup Profile editor (Excel spreadsheet) on your computer. The file names for the Startup Profile editor and the Startup Profile consist of the system ID followed by the appropriate extension.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

152

Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters

Note: Never edit the Startup Profile (.sps file) directly; always use the Startup Profile editor to make changes. 6 Enter the remaining information into the Startup Profile editor that you want loaded onto the BCM50 main unit. The Startup Profile editor contains explanations of the various parameters. Click the cell where you want to enter information, and the Help text appears. You can specify which parameters to load onto your system by selecting Apply. If you do not want to load certain parameters, select Ignore. 7 After you enter all the information, click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile (.sps file) and a version of the Startup Profile editor (Excel spreadsheet) on your computer. Exit from Microsoft Excel. Insert the USB storage device into the USB port of the computer.

8 9

10 Copy the Startup Profile (.sps file) to the root directory of the USB storage device. 11 To load your keycodes using the Startup Profile, copy the keycode file to the root directory of the USB storage device. The name of the keycode file on the USB storage device must exactly match the file name you entered in the Startup Profile editor. 12 Remove the USB storage device from the USB port of the computer. The Startup Profile is now stored on the USB storage device.

To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM50 system

1 2 Disconnect the power supply from the main unit. Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on the main unit. If the BCM50 system has a UPS, insert the USB storage device into the Linux-compatible USB hub. 3 Connect the power supply to the BCM50 system. The BCM50 automatically detects the Startup Profile file and loads the information during the bootup sequence. Loading the Startup Profile adds approximately 5 minutes to the time for the BCM50 system to boot. After you successfully apply the Startup Profile, the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the BCM50 system configuration. After the BCM50 system reboots, the Startup Profile is fully loaded.

NN40020-302

Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters

153

If an error occurs, the status LED flashes red. View the log file (written to the USB storage device) for a description of the Startup Profile errors. If no errors exist, the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the system configuration. After the reboot finishes, the power and status LEDs are solid green. Note: The Startup Profile works only on a BCM50 system with no keycode loaded. After a keycode is loaded, the Startup Profile does not work. This condition prevents unintentional overwriting of the parameters of a configured system.

Remove the USB storage device from the USB port on the BCM50 or the USB hub. Note: Make sure the bootup sequence is complete before removing the USB storage device from the BCM50 system.

Connect the 25-pair cable to the RJ-21 telephony connector on the BCM50 main unit.

The Startup Profile is now loaded on your BCM50 system.

Next step
After you load the Startup Profile, you can connect the data networking cables. For information about connecting these cables, see Completing the initial installation (optional) on page 155.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

154

Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters

NN40020-302

Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional)

155

Chapter 16
Completing the initial installation (optional)
This section provides information about completing the initial installation of your BCM50 system. These options are described for informative purposes only. The figure Overview of completing the initial installation on page 155 shows an overview of completing the initial installation.
Figure 63 Overview of completing the initial installation

Installation and Maintenance Guide

156

Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional)

After the basic configuration finishes, you can further customize your system by using the following configuration options: Configuring the media bay module on page 156 Configuring modem settings on page 157 Checking for software updates on page 157 Configuring voice mail on page 157 Customizing security policies on page 157 Performing a backup on page 158

Configuring the media bay module

For information about installing a media bay module (MBM) and setting the dip switches, see Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 100. For details about connecting the cables between the main unit and expansion units, you can also see Connecting the expansion unit on page 104.

To configure the MBM(s)

1 2 3 Open Element Manager and connect to your BCM50 system. From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it. From the Resources folder, select Telephony Resources. See the figure Telephony Resources page on page 156.

Figure 64 Telephony Resources page

In the Modules section, select the expansion unit to configure.

NN40020-302

Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional)

157

You must include the expansion port feature in your purchased keycode. If you activate one expansion port only, the expansion port on the left (expansion/LAN port 2) is active. Therefore, Expansion 1 must be connected to the active port (expansion/LAN port 2). For location of the LAN ports, see the figure Expansion ports on page 104 and the figure Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 105. 5 6 7 8 Double-click the Module type field to display the list. Select the type of MBM that you installed in the expansion unit. Click Enable. If you installed a second expansion unit, repeat steps 4 to 7 to enable the second MBM.

You can set other parameters for the MBMs depending on the type of MBM you installed.

Configuring modem settings

Your system modem is either enabled or disabled depending on the configuration you chose during your basic configuration. If you use the modem for management tasks, you can customize settings, including dial-in and dial-out settings depending on your specific needs. For information about configuring the modem, see the Networking Configuration Guide.

Checking for software updates

Nortel frequently updates the BCM50 software. Therefore, a standard part of any installation is to ensure your system has the latest version of the software. For information about checking for and installing software updates, see the Administration Guide.

Configuring voice mail

Your voice mail system was initialized during the basic configuration of your BCM50 system. You must still configure your voice mail to take advantage of the many feature available. If you need to perform further configuration tasks, see the documentation for your voice mail system. For information about using the Web-based interface to configure your voice mail system, see the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide, and for information about using Telset Administration to configure your voice mail system, see the CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide.

Customizing security policies

You configured a system password and security settings during the basic configuration of your BCM50 system. Depending on your needs, you can perform further configuration of the security policies.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

158

Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional)

For information about customizing the security policies, see the Administration Guide.

Performing a backup
You can backup your BCM50 system at regular intervals, including after initial installation. Performing a backup ensures that you have a copy of your system data available to restore the system, if needed. For information about backing up and restoring your system, see the Administration Guide.

NN40020-302

Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN

159

Chapter 17
Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN
This section describes how to connect the LAN and WAN cables to the BCM50 system. The figure Overview of connecting data networking cables to the BCM50 system on page 159 shows the steps required to connect the data networking cables to the BCM50 system.
Figure 65 Overview of connecting data networking cables to the BCM50 system

For information about connecting the cables to the BCM50 system: Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN on page 160 Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN on page 161

Installation and Maintenance Guide

160

Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN

Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN

On BCM50 and BCM50b main units, three RJ-45 connectors support LAN connections and one OAM port. On the BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units, six RJ-45 connectors support LAN connections and one OAM port. The figure Ports on a BCM50e main unit on page 160 shows the location of the LAN ports.
Figure 66 Ports on a BCM50e main unit
Router card LAN ports

OAM port (port 0)

LAN por (port 1)t

Expansion/ LAN ports (ports 2, 3) Note: On units with an integrated ADSL modem, the WAN port is an RJ-11 port with additional LEDs.

The table LAN ports on the main unit on page 160 describes the function of each port.
Table 31 LAN ports on the main unit (Sheet 1 of 2)
Port name OAM port Function The OAM port connects an on-site management computer to the main unit. Using this connection, you can access management tools, such as Element Manager, without affecting the main LAN. This port is not connected to the network switch built into the main unit and cannot be connected to other network devices. The LAN port connects the main unit to the LAN. This port connects to the network switch built into the main unit. The expansion ports have two purposes: connecting the expansion units and providing LAN access to other network devices. If an expansion unit is connected to the port, the expansion port provides signaling channels, media channels, and LAN datagrams to the expansion unit. The expansion unit connects the signaling and media channels to the media bay module (MBM) and connects the LAN datagrams to the LAN port on the expansion unit. You can then use the LAN port on the expansion unit to connect network devices, such as IP telephones. If an expansion unit is not connected to the port, you can use the expansion port to connect network devices, such as IP telephones. The expansion ports connect to the network switch built into the main unit. Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port.

LAN port Expansion/LAN ports

NN40020-302

Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN

161

Table 31 LAN ports on the main unit (Sheet 2 of 2)

Port name Router card LAN ports Expansion unit LAN port Function The router card LAN ports connect network devices, such as IP telephones to the LAN. These ports connect to the network switch built into the main unit. Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port. The expansion unit LAN port connects network devices, such as IP telephones to the LAN. These ports are connected to the network switch built into the main unit. Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port.

To connect the BCM50 system to the LAN

1 2 3 Connect one end of a standard Ethernet cable to your LAN. Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the LAN port on the main unit. To use the internal BCM50 network switch to connect another IP device to the LAN, connect an Ethernet cable between the IP device and one of the additional LAN ports on the BCM50 system (Router card LAN ports, Expansion port, or expansion unit LAN port). Repeat step 3 for each IP device you want to connect to the LAN using the BCM50 switch. If you install a BCM50a or BCM50e, proceed to Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN on page 161. If you install a BCM50, proceed to Next step on page 163.

4 5

Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN

Four types of main units contain a router card, the BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, and BCM50be. On the BCM50e and BCM50be, the WAN port is an RJ-45 port. On the BCM50a and BCM50ba, the WAN port is an RJ-11 port. The figure WAN port on a BCM50 main unit on page 162 shows the location of the WAN port on both types of router cards.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

162

Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN

Figure 67 WAN port on a BCM50 main unit

BCM50a main unit

WAN port

BCM50e main unit

WAN port

For information about connecting the BCM50 to the WAN: To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN on page 162 To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN on page 162

To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN

1 Use the Integrated Router Web GUI to configure the router card on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units. For information about how to configure the router, see the BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide. Connect one end of a standard Ethernet cable to your WAN edge device (for example, an external ADSL modem or cable modem). For proper setup and configuration of the device, see the documentation for your WAN edge device. 3 4 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the WAN port. Proceed to Next step on page 163.

To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN

1 Use the Integrated Router Web GUI to configure the router card on the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units. For information about how to configure the router, see the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide. Make sure the power supply is connected to the main unit and to the AC power source (wall outlet).

NN40020-302

Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN

163

Warning: Do not plug the WAN cable into the system unless the power supply is connected to the main unit and an AC power source with a third-wire ground. 3 4 Connect one end of a standard telephone cable to the ADSL telephone line provided by your ISP. Plug the other end of the telephone cable into the WAN port.

Note: If you use the ADSL telephone line for both ADSL and regular voice communication, you must install a splitter filter. Your ADSL service provider supplies the splitter filter. Follow your service provider's instructions about connecting the splitter.

Next step
After you connect the cables to the BCM50 system, you can test the system. For information about testing the BCM50 system, see Testing basic BCM50 functionality on page 165.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

164

Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN

NN40020-302

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

165

Chapter 18
Testing basic BCM50 functionality
This section describes how to test the BCM50 system. For information about testing and troubleshooting the BCM50 system: To test the main unit on page 165 To troubleshoot the main unit on page 166 To test the expansion unit on page 166 To troubleshoot the expansion unit on page 166 To test the MBM on page 167 To test a station MBM on page 167 To test a trunk MBM on page 167 To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager on page 168 To determine why the ATA2 does not function on page 168 To determine why there is no dial tone at the ATA2 on page 168 To check the ATA2 wiring on page 169 Reset to factory settings on page 169 To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset on page 170

To test the main unit

If you have the digital station feature included in your installed keycode, use the following test to ensure the main unit is operating properly: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Go to an extension that is connected to the RJ-21 telephony connector on the main unit. Check for a dial tone. Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system. If this system has an expansion unit with a media bay module (MBM) that supports extensions, repeat steps 3 and 4 for an extension connected to the expansion unit. Go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the main unit. Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs. Check for a dial tone. Make a call using the line or line pool. If this system has an expansion unit with an MBM that supports lines, repeat steps 6 to 8 with an extension that can access one of the lines connected to the expansion unit.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

166

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

To troubleshoot the main unit

If a test fails, use the following procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Verify that any nonfunctional feature is included in your installed keycode. Check the wiring to the main unit and to the MBMs. Make sure that the cables are properly seated and are connected to the correct ports. Reboot the BCM50 system. Check LEDs (see Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61). Use Element Manager or the Telset Administration feature to check the programming for the lines or extensions that failed the call test. If the programming is incorrect, use the Backup and Restore Utility to load a recent backup of system programming. If a recent backup is not available, correct the programming using Element Manager or the Telephone Administration feature.

To test the expansion unit

Use the following test to ensure the expansion unit is operating properly: 1 2 Make sure that the BCM50 system is fully booted. For indications that the system is fully operational, see Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61. Check the power and status LEDs on the MBM that is inserted in the expansion unit. Both LEDs must be solid green. If either LED is not solid green, a problem exists with the MBM or the expansion unit. For a detailed description of the LED states, see Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61. If the expansion unit has an MBM that supports extensions, go to an extension that is connected to the MBM. Check for a dial tone. Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system. If the expansion unit has an MBM that supports lines, go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the MBM. Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs. Check for a dial tone. Make a call using the line or line pool.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

To troubleshoot the expansion unit

1 2 Check that the correct feature for the expansion unit is included in your installed keycode. Check that the expansion port is connected to the proper connector. For location of the LAN ports, see the figure Expansion ports on page 104 and the figure Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 105.

NN40020-302

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

167

3 4

Check the wiring to the MBM. Make sure that the cables are properly seated and are connected to the correct ports with proper LED indications. Check that the switches on the MBM are all set to on. For more information about these switches, see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96. If the MBM is a GASM or GATM, all the switches on the right are not on. For information about setting these switches, see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96. To check the MBM switches, you must remove the MBM from the expansion unit. For instructions, see Replacing a media bay module on page 183.

5 6 7 8

Perform a firmware download to ensure that the correct version is loaded on the ASM/GASM or GATM unit. Use Element Manager or Telset Admin to check the programming for the lines or extensions connected to the MBM. Reboot the system to ensure that the BCM50 main unit functions correctly. If the programming is incorrect, use the Backup and Restore Utility to load a recent backup of system programming. If a recent backup is not available, correct the programming using Element Manager or the Telephone Administration feature.

To test the MBM

1 Check the Power and Status LEDs on the MBM. Both LEDs must be solid green. If either LED is not solid green, a problem exists with the MBM. For a detailed description of the LED states, see Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) on page 66. Perform a call test to make sure the new MBM functions correctly. If you replaced a station MBM, use To test a station MBM on page 167. If you replaced a trunk MBM, use To test a trunk MBM on page 167. If you replaced a 4x16 MBM, use To test a station MBM on page 167 and To test a trunk MBM on page 167.

To test a station MBM

1 2 3 4 Go to an extension on the MBM. Check for a dial tone. Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system. Use this extension to make a call to an external telephone number.

To test a trunk MBM

1 2 3 4 Go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the MBM. Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs. Check for a dial tone. Make a call using the line or line pool.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

168

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager

1 2 Check that the correct feature for the expansion unit is included in your installed keycode. Check that both the Power and Status LEDs on the MBM are solid green. If the Power LED is off, check that the power supply cable is properly seated in the expansion unit and the power supply is connected to a working power outlet. Also check that the MBM is properly seated in the expansion unit. If the Status LED is not solid green, check that the Expansion cable is properly seated in the Expansion port on the expansion unit and on the main unit.

3 4

Check that the MBM and expansion unit are enabled using either Element Manager or Telset Administration. If the units are enabled, disable them, and then re-enable them. Check that all the switches on the MBM are on. For more information about these switches, see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96. If the MBM is a GASM or GATM, all the switches on the right are not set to on. For information about setting these switches, see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96. To check the MBM switches, you must remove the MBM from the expansion unit. For instructions, see Replacing a media bay module on page 183.

To determine why the ATA2 does not function

1 2 3 4 5 6 Check for a dial tone using an analog device. Check that AC power is connected to the ATA2 unit. Check that the correct feature for digital sets is included in your installed keycode. Verify that the ATA2 is connected to a digital station port. Allow sufficient startup time (3060 sec). Plug an analog device into the phone port of the ATA2 and check for a dial-tone.

To determine why there is no dial tone at the ATA2

1 2 If you hear no dial tone, replace a single-line telephone for the data communication device. If you hear no dial tone at the ATA2 unit: a b Disconnect the line side of the ATA2. Connect a digital telephone to the ATA2 port. Check that the connection from the ATA2 to the BCM50 hardware works correctly.

NN40020-302

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

169

To check the ATA2 wiring

1 2 Use an analog phone to test the ATA2. Check the following connections: a ATA2 to the terminal The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and 1300 ohms or less for voice applications. BCM50 hardware to the ATA2 The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0.5 mm wire (2600 ft. of 24-AWG) or less. Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the BCM50 hardware and ATA2.

Reset to factory settings

This section describes how to reset the BCM50 system to the factory settings or a stable working condition using the reset switch (see the figure Reset switch location on page 169). When the BCM50 is in this condition, you can make further modifications.
Figure 68 Reset switch location

Reset switch

Some possible situations in which you use the reset feature are: If the BCM50 system is configured incorrectly to an extent that it is no longer functional. The customer must use a level 1 reset to return to the default system programming and restore a previous configuration or reconfigure the system. If distributors want to reuse BCM50 systems, they must first erase all customer-specific data using a level 1 or level 2 reset.

Reset levels
Reset to factory settings is a stand-alone feature that has the following levels of reset: Level 1 reset erases all customer-specific data and restores the default configuration for all components. This reset leaves the software components untouched. That is, the system has the latest release and patch level of the software installed. Only the system and user configuration data is erased and replaced with default values. No Ethernet connectivity to the system occurs during this operation.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

170

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

Level 2 reset erases all customer and system configuration data and all software releases and patches. This reset re-installs the original factory configuration settings. Level 2 reset also resets the router firmware to what was shipped from the factory. No Ethernet connectivity to the system occurs during this operation. Warning: If you perform a Level 2 reset to solve an undetermined problem and still have access to Element Manager, you must retrieve all the log files for technical support before performing the Level 2 reset. A Level 2 reset erases all log files from the system.

Activate the reset feature

You activate the reset feature by pressing the reset switch with a long, thin, nonmetallic needle in the sequence described in the procedure To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset on page 170. Warning: Before performing a Level 1 or Level 2 reset, review all the effects of the levels of reset. See Reset levels on page 169.

As you press the reset switch, the LEDs blink in a predefined fashion to guide and confirm user input. The various states of the power and status LEDs indicate the following: A blinking power LED indicates a user input window; the BCM50 system is waiting for user input. A solid red power LED indicates extreme action is requested; caution is urged. A solid status LED (any color) indicates level of reset action: Level 1 is yellow Level 2 is red A blinking status LED indicates an interim state; trying to establish user request. A solid status LED indicates confirmation of a user selection (power LED has priority).

To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset

The router configuration of a BCM50a or BCM50e is not affected by a Level 1 reset. To perform a soft reset on the router, use Element Manager. See the figure Level 1 and Level 2 reset sequence on page 171, or follow the sequence in the table Level 1 reset on page 172 and the table Level 2 reset on page 172 to perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset.

NN40020-302

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

171

Figure 69 Level 1 and Level 2 reset sequence

Reset query state

((

))

Pres s re

Level 1 reset pending

set

((
t rese ess r p r not time Do nd o c e 5s
Pre ss r ese t

))
Pres s re set

Level 2 reset pending

Level 1 reset confirm

((

))

Perform level 1 reset

Level 2 reset confirm

Do not press reset 10 second timer

(( ((
Do not press reset 10 second timer

)) ))

Pre ss r ese t

n se ot p co r nd ess tim res er et

(( ((

)) ))

Do

System is ready

Wait 5 minutes

Perform level 2 reset

Wait 17 minutes

System reboots
(Reset request cancelled) Note 1: In the reset confirm steps, the lower LED flashes faster than the upper LED. Note 2: All times in this figure are approximate. System is ready

Installation and Maintenance Guide

172

Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality

Table 32 Level 1 reset

Step User action Power LED Solid yellow 1 Boot the system Solid yellow Flashing yellow Press reset switch Solid red Status LED Solid yellow Off Solid yellow Flashing yellow System state Power self-test Power self-test Ready for reset input Do not press reset Request Level 1 reset switch; system boots normally Press reset switch; Awaiting Level 1 reset system proceeds to confirmation Level 2 reset System performs Level 1 reset All configuration programming erased. System rebooted and is ready for user action. No action; system remains off Alternative user action

Wait five seconds

Flashing red

Flashing yellow

Solid red 4 Press reset switch Solid green

Solid yellow

Do not press reset switch; system boots normally

Solid green

Table 33 Level 2 reset

Step User action Power LED Solid yellow 1 Boot up the system Solid yellow Flashing yellow Press reset switch Solid red Status LED Solid yellow Off Solid yellow Flashing yellow System state Power self-test Power self-test Ready for reset input Do not press reset Request Level 1 reset switch; system boots normally Do not press reset Request Level 2 reset switch; system remains in Level 1 reset state Press reset switch; Awaiting Level 2 reset system proceeds to confirmation Nortel factory mode (do not use) System performs Level 2 reset; all configuration programming and software updates erased. System rebooted and is ready for user action. No action; system remains off Alternative user action

Press reset switch again within five Solid red seconds of the first button press.

Flashing red

Wait five seconds 4

Flashing red

Flashing red

Solid red 5 Press reset switch

Solid red

Do not press reset switch; system boots normally

Solid green

Solid green

NN40020-302

Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components

173

Chapter 19
Replacing the BCM50 system components
This section provides an overview of how to replace the BCM50 system components. The figure Overview of replacing the BCM50 system components on page 173 shows the steps required to replace the BCM50 system components. This section also describes common procedures required to prepare the system for maintenance.
Figure 70 Overview of replacing the BCM50 system components

For information about replacing the BCM50 components: Replacing a power supply on page 175 Replacing a main unit on page 179 Replacing a media bay module on page 183 Replacing an expansion unit on page 187 Replacing an internal component on page 193

Installation and Maintenance Guide

174

Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components

Preparing the system for maintenance

Use the following procedure to prepare the system for maintenance. This procedure is referenced throughout the maintenance portion of this document:

To shut down the system

1 2 3 4 5 Check for a recent backup of the BCM50 system programming. If no recent backup is available, then use Element Manager to back up the system data. For information about backing up the system data, see the Administration Guide. In Element Manager, from the Administration tab, click the Utilities folder to expand it. From the Utilities folder, select Reset. Click Reboot BCM50 System to reboot the system. The BCM50 system begins the shutdown process. 6 Unplug the main unit when the status and power LEDs change from solid green to flashing orange.

Restarting the system after maintenance

When you finish your maintenance procedure, restart the BCM system in the order described in this section.

To return the system to operation

1 Check the Power and Status LEDs on the main unit. After the BCM50 starts, both LEDs must be solid green. If either LED is not solid green, a problem with the main unit exists. For a detailed description of the LED states, see System status LEDs on page 61. If this system has an expansion unit, check the Power and Status LEDs on the media bay module (MBM) in the expansion unit. Both LEDs must be solid green. If either LED is not solid green, a problem exists with the MBM or the expansion unit. For a detailed description of the LED states, see Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) on page 66. If this system has a second expansion unit, check the Power and Status LEDs on the second MBM. Use Element Manager to restore the programming. For information about restoring system programming, see the Administration Guide. Set the basic configuration parameters. For more information, see Configuring the BCM50 system on page 127. Warning: When you restart the system, all digital telephony, IP client voice mail, and VoIP ports are not available until the system services restart.

3 4 5

NN40020-302

Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply

175

Chapter 20
Replacing a power supply
This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a power supply. The figure Overview of replacing the BCM50 power supply on page 175 shows an overview of replacing a power supply.
Figure 71 Overview of replacing the BCM50 power supply

For information about replacing a power supply: Preparing the system for maintenance on page 176 Removing the power supply on page 176 Connect the new power supply on page 176

Installation and Maintenance Guide

176

Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply

Preparing the system for maintenance

In most cases, if the power supply for the main unit is faulty, the system is already shut down. If this is the case, proceed to Removing the power supply on page 176. If you replace the expansion unit power supply, or if the system is still operating, perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 174.

Removing the power supply

Before you disconnect the power supply, read the warnings about connecting network lines in Wiring warnings on page 109.

To remove the power supply

1 Remove the telephony and data networking lines from the BCM50 units. These lines include: 2 3 the RJ-21 telephony connector on the main unit the ADSL line in the WAN port on a BCM50a main unit any analog telephone lines in the media bay modules (MBM) in the expansion units any digital telephone lines in the MBMs in the expansion units

Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord. Remove the power supply cord from the BCM50 unit. Warning: Leakage currents You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet.

4 5 6

Remove the power supply cord from the AC wall outlet. If your system has a UPS, remove the power supply cord from the UPS socket. Remove the power supply from the table, rack-mount shelf, or wall-mount bracket. Proceed to Connect the new power supply on page 176.

Connect the new power supply

Before you connect the power supply, read the warnings about connecting network lines in Wiring warnings on page 109.

NN40020-302

Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply

177

To connect the new power supply

1 2 3 Connect the new power supply. See Connecting the power supply on page 106. Connect the telephony and data networking lines that you removed in Step 1 of Removing the power supply on page 176. Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 174.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

178

Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply

NN40020-302

Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit

179

Chapter 21
Replacing a main unit
Three types of main units are available: the BCM50, the BCM50a, and the BCM50e. This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a main unit. The figure Overview of replacing a main unit on page 179 shows an overview of replacing a main unit.
Figure 72 Overview of replacing a main unit

Installation and Maintenance Guide

180

Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit

For information about replacing the BCM50 main unit: Preparing the system for maintenance on page 180 Removing the main unit on page 180 Installing the new main unit on page 181

Preparing the system for maintenance

In most cases, if the BCM50 main unit is faulty, the system is already shut down. If this is the case, continue with the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 180. If the system is still operating, perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 174.

To disconnect the cables

1 2 3 4 Remove the 25-pair cable from the RJ-21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit. Remove the Ethernet cable from the LAN port. If the main unit is a BCM50a or a BCM50e, remove the Ethernet cable or ADSL line from the WAN port and the Ethernet cables from the Router card LAN ports. Remove the expansion cables or LAN cables from the expansion ports on the main unit. For the expansion cables, make sure you mark the cables with the number of the port to which they connect. If the system uses the external Music Source port, remove the cable from the Music Source port. If the system uses a UPS, remove the USB cable from the USB port. Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord. Remove the power supply cord from the main unit. Warning: Leakage currents You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet. 9 Proceed to Removing the main unit on page 180.

5 6 7 8

Removing the main unit

The method you use to remove the main unit depends on how the unit is mounted. Use one of the following procedures to remove the main unit: To remove a rack-mounted main unit on page 181 To remove a wall-mounted main unit on page 181 To remove a desktop mounted main unit on page 181

NN40020-302

Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit

181

To remove a rack-mounted main unit

1 2 3 4 5 6 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit. If necessary, see the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 180. If a unit is mounted to the top of the main unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the main unit. Lift the unit off of the top of the main unit. If the main unit is secured to the rack-mount shelf with screws, remove these screws from the bottom of the rack-mount shelf. Slide the main unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the rack-mount shelf. Lift the main unit off of the rack-mount shelf and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Proceed to Installing the new main unit on page 181.

To remove a wall-mounted main unit

1 2 3 4 5 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit. If necessary, see the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 180. Lift the main unit until it disengages from the clips on the wall-mount bracket. Pull the main unit out and away from the wall-mount bracket. Set the main unit on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Proceed to Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 86.

To remove a desktop mounted main unit

1 2 3 4 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit. If necessary, see the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 180. If a unit is mounted to the top of the main unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the main unit. Lift the unit off of the top of the main unit. Lift the main unit off of the table and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Continue with the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 91.

Installing the new main unit

Use one of the following procedures to install the new BCM50 main unit: Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 83 To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 88 To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 91

After you install the new BCM50 main unit, proceed to the procedure To connect the cables on page 182.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

182

Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit

To connect the cables

1 2 3 4 5 Insert the power supply retention clip into the new main unit. Rotate the power supply retention clip so that the power supply jack is clear. Connect the power supply cord to the main unit. Rotate the power supply retention clip to lock the power supply cord in place. Connect to AC power source: a b 6 7 If the system has a UPS, connect the USB cable to the USB port on the main unit and plug the UPS power cord into the AC power source (wall outlet). If the system has no UPS, plug the power supply cable into the AC power source (wall outlet).

If the system uses the external Music Source port, connect the music source cable to the Music Source port on the main unit. Connect the expansion cables or LAN cables to the expansion ports on the main unit. For expansion cables, make sure you connect the cables to the expansion ports from which you removed them to ensure the same line and extension numbering. If the main unit is a BCM50a or BCM50e, connect the Ethernet cable or ADSL line to the WAN port and the Ethernet cables to the Router card LAN ports. Warning: Leakage currents You must connect the power cord to a grounded outlet before connecting the telephony and data networking cables to the system.

Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN port.

10 Connect the 25-pair cable to the RJ-21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit. 11 Secure the RJ-21 connector to the BCM50 main unit. If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two screws on the sides of the connector to secure it. If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use a cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the BCM50 main unit. 12 Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 174.

NN40020-302

Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module

183

Chapter 22
Replacing a media bay module
This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a media bay module (MBM). The figure Overview of replacing an MBM on page 183 shows an overview of replacing the MBM.
Figure 73 Overview of replacing an MBM

See the following procedures to replace an MBM: To remove the MBM on page 184 To insert the new MBM on page 185

Installation and Maintenance Guide

184

Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module

To remove the MBM

1 2 Use Element Manager to disable the MBM. For more information about disabling an MBM, see the Administration Guide. If the expansion unit is wall-mounted, it must be removed from the wall-mount bracket before you remove the MBM. For more information, see the procedure To remove a wall-mounted expansion unit on page 189, and then proceed to step 7. Disconnect all of the telephone line and extension cables from the MBM. If more than one cable exists, mark the cables to identify the port from which you removed them. Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord. Remove the power supply cord from the expansion unit. Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Pull out the ejector lever with your index finger. Then grasp the ejector lever with your thumb and index finger and pull outward to disengage the MBM. See the figure Pull out the ejector lever with your index finger. Then grasp the ejector lever with your thumb and index finger and pull outward to disengage the MBM. See the figure . Finish removing the MBM by hand. on page 184. Finish removing the MBM by hand.

4 5 6 7

Figure 74 Remove an MBM

Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward

Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM. Remove the MBM from the expansion unit. Place the MBM on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the components in a static-free container.

Continue with the procedure To insert the new MBM on page 185.

NN40020-302

Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module

185

To insert the new MBM

1 2 3 4 Unpack the new MBM. Verify that all dip switches are in the factory default positions. See Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 96. Install the MBM. See Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 100. If the new MBM is a different type of module (for example, you replaced a DSM16 with a 4x16), use Element Manager to configure the new MBM before continuing. For more information about configuring the MBM, see the procedure To configure the MBM(s) on page 156. Reconnect the power supply cable. See the procedure To connect a power supply without a UPS on page 107. Connect the telephone line and extension cables to the port on the front of the new MBM. See Connecting the lines and extensions on page 108. If the new MBM is a different type of module (for example, you replaced a DSM16 with a 4x16), you must make any additional connections to the MBM before continuing. 7 8 Proceed to the procedure To test the MBM on page 167. Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 174.

5 6

Installation and Maintenance Guide

186

Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module

NN40020-302

Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit

187

Chapter 23
Replacing an expansion unit
This chapter describes the procedure for replacing an expansion unit. The figure Overview of replacing an expansion unit on page 187 shows an overview of replacing an expansion unit.
Figure 75 Overview of replacing an expansion unit

Installation and Maintenance Guide

188

Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit

For information about replacing an expansion unit: Disconnecting the cables on page 188 Removing the expansion unit on page 188 Removing the MBM on page 190 Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit on page 190 Installing the new expansion unit on page 191

Disconnecting the cables

Use the following procedure to disconnect the expansion unit from the other equipment.

To disconnect the expansion unit cables

1 2 3 4 Use Element Manager to disable the media bay module (MBM) that is installed in the expansion unit. For more information, see the Administration Guide. Disconnect the expansion cable from the expansion port on the expansion unit. Disconnect the LAN cable from the LAN port on the expansion unit. Disconnect all of the telephone lines and extension cables from the MBM inserted in the expansion unit. If more than one cable exists, mark the cables to identify the port from which you removed them. Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord. Remove the power supply cord from the expansion unit. Warning: Leakage currents You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet. 7 Proceed to Removing the expansion unit on page 188.

5 6

Removing the expansion unit

How you remove the expansion unit depends on how the unit is mounted. Use one of the following procedures to remove the expansion unit: To remove a rack-mounted expansion unit on page 189 To remove a wall-mounted expansion unit on page 189 To remove a desktop-mounted expansion unit on page 189

NN40020-302

Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit

189

To remove a rack-mounted expansion unit

1 2 3 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit. If necessary, see the procedure To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 188. If a unit is mounted to the top of the expansion unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the expansion unit. Lift the unit off the top of the expansion unit. If the expansion unit is mounted on top of another unit, slide the expansion unit forward until it disengages from the clips of the other unit. Go to step 6. If the expansion unit is not mounted on top of another unit, continue to the next step. If the expansion unit is secured to the rack-mount shelf with screws, remove these screws from the bottom of the rack-mount shelf. Slide the expansion unit forward until is disengages from the clips on the rack-mount shelf. Lift the expansion unit off of the rack-mount shelf or other unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Continue with the procedure To remove the MBM on page 184.

4 5 6 7

To remove a wall-mounted expansion unit

1 2 3 4 5 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit. If necessary, see the procedure To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 188. Lift the expansion unit until it disengages from the clips on the wall-mount bracket. Pull out the expansion unit and move it away from the wall-mount bracket. Set the expansion unit on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Proceed to Removing the MBM on page 190.

To remove a desktop-mounted expansion unit

1 2 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit. If necessary, see the procedure To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 188. If a unit is mounted to the top of the expansion unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the expansion unit. Lift the unit off the top of the expansion unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. If the expansion unit is mounted on top of another unit, slide the expansion unit forward until it disengages from the clips of the other unit. Lift the expansion unit off of the table or other unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Proceed to Removing the MBM on page 190.

3 4 5

Installation and Maintenance Guide

190

Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit

Removing the MBM

After you remove the expansion unit, use the following procedure to remove the MBM from the expansion unit.

To remove the MBM

1 2 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Grasp the right edge of the MBM ejector lever with your thumb, index, and middle fingers. Pull outward to partially eject the MBM. Pull further on the lever to eject the MBM from the expansion unit. See the figure Remove an MBM on page 190.

Figure 76 Remove an MBM

Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward

Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM. Remove the MBM from the expansion unit. Place the MBM in a flat, clean, and static-free surface. Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the components in a static-free container.

Proceed to Installing the new expansion unit on page 191.

Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit

To insert the MBM in the new expansion unit, see Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 100. Proceed to Installing the new expansion unit on page 191.

NN40020-302

Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit

191

Installing the new expansion unit

Use one of the following procedures to install the new expansion unit: Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 82 Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 86 Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 91

After you install the new expansion unit, continue with the procedure To connect the cables on page 191.

To connect the cables

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Insert the power supply retention clip into the new expansion unit. Rotate the power supply retention clip so that the power supply jack is clear. Connect the power supply cord to the expansion unit. Rotate the power supply retention clip to lock the power supply cord in place. Connect the expansion cable to the expansion port on the front of the expansion unit. Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port on the front of the expansion unit (if applicable). Connect all of the telephone line and extension cables to the MBM inserted in the expansion unit. To ensure the same line and extension numbering, make sure you connect the cables to the ports from which you removed them. Warning: Leakage currents You must connect the power cord to a grounded outlet before connecting the telephony and data networking cables to the system. 8 Use Element Manager to enable the MBM. For more information about enabling an MBM, see the Administration Guide.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

192

Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit

NN40020-302

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

193

Chapter 24
Replacing an internal component
You can replace three components inside the main unit: the hard disk, the fan, and the router card. The figure Overview of replacing an internal component on page 193 shows an overview of replacing an internal component. Caution: You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling electronic components. Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment.
Figure 77 Overview of replacing an internal component

Installation and Maintenance Guide

194

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

For information about replacing an internal component: Preparing the system for maintenance on page 194 Removing the main unit on page 194 Opening the main unit case on page 194 Removing an internal component on page 196 Inserting the new component on page 199 Closing the main unit case on page 204 Installing the main unit on page 205

Special tools
Before you replace the components, ensure you have the following equipment: Phillips screwdriver #2, with a 3.5-inch blade 3/16-inch slot screwdriver antistatic wrist grounding strap Caution: You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling electronic components. Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment.

Preparing the system for maintenance

If the system is still operating, perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 174. After the system shuts down, perform the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 180.

Removing the main unit

The method you use to remove the main unit depends on how the unit is mounted. Use one of the following procedures to remove the BCM50 main unit: To remove a rack-mounted main unit on page 181 To remove a wall-mounted main unit on page 181 To remove a desktop mounted main unit on page 181

Opening the main unit case

This procedure is based on the assumption that you intend to perform maintenance activities. Do not operate the main unit with the cover removed.

NN40020-302

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

195

To open the main unit case

Danger: Electrical shock warning. Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the BCM50 main unit. 1 2 3 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Turn the main unit over so that the bottom of the unit is facing up. Remove the three case screws from the back of the unit. For the location of the screws, see the figure BCM50 case screws on page 195.

Figure 78 BCM50 case screws

screws

4 5

Turn the BCM50 unit over so that the top of the unit is facing up. While holding the bottom of the BCM50 case, slide the top of the case back to disengage the locking clips. See the figure Remove the top of the case on page 196.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

196

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

Figure 79 Remove the top of the case

6 7

Lift the top of the case off the BCM50 unit. Proceed to Removing an internal component on page 196.

Removing an internal component

Use one of the following procedures to remove the component: To remove the hard disk on page 197 To remove the fan on page 198 To remove the router card on page 199 Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the components in static-free container.

NN40020-302

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

197

To remove the hard disk

Caution: Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk. You can lose the information stored on the disk. Shock can damage the hard disk. Do not drop or hit the hard disk. 1 2 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Remove the two screws that attach the hard disk assembly to the main unit. See the figure Cable routing on page 202.

Figure 80 Hard disk and bracket installation

Remove these screws

Fan cable clips Fan cable cutouts

Lift the hard disk and hard disk bracket from the main unit and place them on a flat, clean, static-free surface.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

198

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

Remove the four screws that secure the hard disk to the hard disk bracket. See the figure Hard disk and bracket assembly on page 198.

Figure 81 Hard disk and bracket assembly

Hard disk

Hard disk bracket screws Hard disk bracket Hard disk/power cable connector

Hard disk cable

Power cable Hard disk bracket screws

5 6 7

Remove the hard disk and power cable from the connector. Lift the hard disk from the hard disk bracket and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 199.

To remove the fan

1 2 3 4 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Ensure the main unit case is open. If necessary, see Opening the main unit case on page 194. Remove the hard disk to access the fan cable. See the procedure To remove the hard disk on page 197. Remove the fan cable from the header. See the figure Location of fan on page 199.

NN40020-302

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

199

Figure 82 Location of fan

Fan

5 6

Lift the fan from the main unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 199.

To remove the router card

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Ensure the main unit case is open. If necessary, see Opening the main unit case on page 194. Remove the three router card retaining screws. Gently lift the back of the router card to disengage it from the card connector. Slide the router card back so the modular connectors clear the bezel. Lift the router card over the top of the LED pipes and place it on a flat, clean, static-free surface. Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 199.

Inserting the new component

Use one of the following procedures to insert the new component: To insert the new hard disk on page 200 To insert the new fan on page 202 To insert the new router card on page 203

Installation and Maintenance Guide

200

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement part. Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.

Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the components in static-free container.

To insert the new hard disk

Caution: Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk. You can lose the information stored on the disk. Shock can damage the hard disk. Do not drop or hit the hard disk. 1 2 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Connect the hard disk cable and power cable to the hard disk connector. See the figure Hard disk and bracket assembly on page 200. Note: If the cables do not insert properly, check that the notch on the hard disk connector is aligned with the corresponding notch on the cable.

Figure 83 Hard disk and bracket assembly

Hard disk

Hard disk bracket screws Hard disk bracket Hard disk/power cable connector

Hard disk cable

Power cable Hard disk bracket screws

NN40020-302

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

201

3 4

Place the new hard disk in the hard disk bracket. Use the four hard disk bracket screws to secure the hard disk to the bracket. Caution: Use only the screws that you removed from the hard disk in the procedure To remove the hard disk on page 197. Using other screws can damage the hard disk.

Set the hard disk and bracket in the main unit. See the figure Cable routing on page 202. Make sure that the hard disk cable and power cable are routed properly. Route the power cable under the bracket and loop the hard disk cable as shown.

Figure 84 Hard disk and bracket installation

Fan cable clips Fan cable cutouts

Press down lightly on the top of the hard disk to ensure that the hard disk bracket is seated properly.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

202

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

Ensure you route the fan cable through the cutouts under the hard disk and bracket. Also, make sure you secure any slack in the fan cable in the clips on the hard disk bracket. See the figure Cable routing on page 202).

Figure 85 Cable routing

Caution: Ensure that you follow the same routing for the cables as before you removed the component. 8 9 Fasten the hard disk assembly to the main unit with two screws. Use only the supplied screws, since other screws can damage the unit. Perform a restore or manually reprogram the system.

10 Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 204.

To insert the new fan

1 2 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Insert the new fan into the fan slot in the bottom of the BCM50 case.

NN40020-302

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

203

Ensure the fans are oriented so air flows out of the unit. Note: Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back of the BCM50 unit. Air must flow out of the unit as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan. 3 4 Connect the fan cable to the header. Ensure your route the fan cable through the cutouts under the hard disk and bracket. Also, make sure that you secure any slack in the fan cable with the clips on the hard disk bracket. See the figure Cable routing on page 202. Note: Do not force the cable. The connectors on the fan cable prevents you from inserting the cable backwards. If you cannot insert the cable properly, check that the raised edge on the fan cable connector faces the plastic tab on the header. 5 6 Insert the hard disk. See the procedure To insert the new hard disk on page 200. Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 204.

To insert the new router card

1 2 3 4 5 6 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. With the back of the router card raised enough to clear the LED pipes, align the modular connectors on the router card with the corresponding holes in the bezel. Move the router card forward until the front edge of the card touches the bezel. Align the card connector on the router card with the connector on the Compact Services Card (CSC). Gently press down on the back of the router card to seat the router card in the connector on the CSC. Use the three screws you removed in the procedure To remove the router card on page 199 to secure the Router card to the CSC. Caution: Use only the original screws to secure the Router card. Using other screws can interfere with proper installation. 7 Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 204.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

204

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

Closing the main unit case

To close the main unit case
1 2 3 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface. Place the top of the case on top of the main unit case. Make sure the side edges of the case are aligned and the front of the top is back about 1 cm (3/8 in.). Slide the top of the case forward until it clicks in place. See the figure Replacing the top of the case on page 204.

Figure 86 Replacing the top of the case

4 5

Turn the main unit over so you can access the screws holes on the bottom of the unit. Insert the three case screws in the back of the unit and tighten them. For the location of the screws, see the figure BCM50 case screws on page 195. Caution: Use only the screws that you removed from the unit in the procedure Opening the main unit case on page 194. Do not use any other screws.

6 7

Turn the main unit over so that the top of the unit faces up. Proceed to Installing the main unit on page 205.

NN40020-302

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

205

Installing the main unit

Use one of the following procedures to install the BCM50 main unit: Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 83 To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 88 To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 91

Connecting the cables

Use the procedure To connect the cables on page 182 to reconnect the cables to the main unit.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

206

Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component

NN40020-302

Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart

207

Appendix A
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart
You can connect 4 analog telephone lines (standard main units only), 4 analog telephony devices, and 12 digital telephones to the RJ-21 telephony connector. Note: The four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are available only on the standard main units. The four analog lines are not available on the BRI series (b-series) main units, which have two BRI ports instead.

The figure RJ-21 telephony connector on a BCM50 on page 207 shows the RJ-21 telephony connector on a BCM50.
Figure 87 RJ-21 telephony connector on a BCM50
Main Unit

RJ-21 telephony connector pin out RJ-21 telephony connector

The table RJ-21 telephony connector wiring on page 207 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 telephony connector.
Table 34 RJ-21 telephony connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 3)
Device 1 Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White White-Green Green-White White-Brown Brown-White Type of device Analog line Port Default DN Default line number 061

Analog line

062

Analog line

063

Analog line

064

Note: The four analog lines are available only on the standard main units; the analog lines are not available on the BRI series (b-series) main units, which have two BRI ports instead.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

208

Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart

Table 34 RJ-21 telephony connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 3)

Device 5 Pin 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Wire color White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red Red-Green Green-Red Type of device Analog telephone Analog telephone Analog telephone Analog telephone No connection Auxiliary Ringer Page Relay Port 413 Default DN 233 Default line number

414

234

415

235

416

236

No connection Red-Brown No connection Brown-Red Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Red-Slate Slate-Red Black-Blue Blue-Black Black-Orange Orange-Black Black-Green Green-Black Black-Brown Brown-Black Black-Slate Slate-Black Yellow-Blue Blue-Yellow Yellow-Orange Orange-Yellow Yellow-Green Green-Yellow Yellow-Brown Brown-Yellow Yellow-Slate Slate-Yellow Violet-Blue Blue-Violet Violet-Orange Orange-Violet

10

11

12

Page Output

13

Music Source Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone

14

412

232

15

411

231

16

410

230

17

409

229

18

408

228

19

407

227

20

406

226

21

405

225

22

404

224

NN40020-302

Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart

209

Table 34 RJ-21 telephony connector wiring (Sheet 3 of 3)

Device 23 Pin 48 23 49 24 50 25 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Wire color Violet-Green Green-Violet Violet-Brown Brown-Violet Violet-Slate Slate-Violet Type of device Digital telephone Digital telephone Digital telephone Port 403 Default DN 223 Default line number

24

402

222

25

401

221

Installation and Maintenance Guide

210

Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart

NN40020-302

Appendix B BRI wiring chart

211

Appendix B
BRI wiring chart
The digital BRI ISDN lines connects to the BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units through the BRI ports (RJ-45) on the front of the main units. See the figure BRI ports and pin out (BCM50b shown) on page 211. The figure BRI ports and pin out (BCM50b shown) on page 211, the table BRI port wiring on page 211, and the table BRI line numbering on page 212 apply to S-Loop and T-Loop connections. S-Loop are used to connect S-Loop devices such as video phones, terminal adapters, and Grp 3 Fax machines. The T-Loops are used to connect to the CO/PSTN. Warning: For a U-loop connection, the BRI port must be connected only to an NT1 provided by the service provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV) to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.
Figure 88 BRI ports and pin out (BCM50b shown)
BRI ports

BRI port pin out

The table BRI port wiring on page 211 and the table BRI line numbering on page 212 list the wiring details for the RJ-45 ports.
Table 35 BRI port wiring
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal No connection No connection + Receive (+Rx) + Transmit (+Tx) - Transmit (-Tx) - Receive (-Rx) No connection No connection Signal on system side No connection No connection +Tx +Rx -Rx -Tx No connection No connection

Installation and Maintenance Guide

212

Appendix B BRI wiring chart

Table 36 BRI line numbering

Port number 1 2 3 4 Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102

NN40020-302

Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart

213

Appendix C
LAN ports wiring chart
All BCM50 units have LAN ports as follows: The BCM50 and BCM50b have three LAN ports. The BCM50a and BCM50ba have seven LAN ports. The BCM50e and BCM50be have seven LAN ports. The expansion unit has one LAN port.

The figure LAN ports on the BCM50 units on page 213 shows the LAN ports on the BCM50 units.
Figure 89 LAN ports on the BCM50 units
BCM50/BCM50b Expansion unit

OAM port

LAN port BCM50a BCM50e

LAN port

LAN ports BCM50ba

LAN ports BCM50be

LAN ports

LAN ports

LAN port pin out

Installation and Maintenance Guide

214

Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart

The table LAN port wiring on page 214 lists the wiring details for the LAN ports.
Table 37 LAN port wiring
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal + Receive Data (Rx+) Receive Data (Rx) + Transmit Data (Tx+) No connection No connection Transmit Data (Tx) No connection No connection

NN40020-302

Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart

215

Appendix D
WAN ports wiring chart
Four BCM50 main units, the BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be, have a Router card. On a BCM50a and BCM50ba main units, the WAN port is an RJ-11 port. On a BCM50e and BCM50be main units, the WAN port is an RJ-45 port. The figure BCM50a,BCM50ba, BCM50e, BCM50be main unit WAN ports on page 215 shows the WAN ports for the BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be.
Figure 90 BCM50a,BCM50ba, BCM50e, BCM50be main unit WAN ports
BCM50a (BCM50ba) WAN port LAN ports

RJ-11 pin out

BCM50e (BCM50be) WAN port LAN ports

RJ-45 pin out

The table RJ-11 WAN port wiring on page 215 and the table RJ-45 WAN port wiring on page 216 list the wiring details for the WAN ports.
Table 38 RJ-11 WAN port wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Pin 1 2 3 Signal No connection No connection Ring

Installation and Maintenance Guide

216

Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart

Table 38 RJ-11 WAN port wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)

Pin 4 5 6 Signal Tip No connection No connection

Table 39 RJ-45 WAN port wiring

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal + Receive Data (Rx+) Receive Data (Rx) + Transmit Data (Tx+) No connection No connection Transmit Data (Tx) No connection No connection

NN40020-302

Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart

217

Appendix E
Expansion ports wiring chart
Two of the four RJ-45 connectors on the BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units are designated as expansion ports. See the figure Expansion ports on a BCM50 and an expansion unit on page 217. These ports connect to an expansion unit or connect network devices to the LAN.
Figure 91 Expansion ports on a BCM50 and an expansion unit
BCM50 main unit

Expansion/LAN (port 2)

Expansion/LAN (port 3)

Expansion unit Expansion port pin out

Expansion port

The table Expansion port wiring on page 217 lists the wiring details for the expansion ports.
Table 40 Expansion port wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal + Ethernet Receive Data Ethernet Receive Data + Ethernet Transmit Data FS256 Transmit Data + FS256 Transmit Data Ethernet Transmit Data

Installation and Maintenance Guide

218

Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart

Table 40 Expansion port wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)

Pin 7 8 Signal FS256 Receive Data + FS256 Receive Data

NN40020-302

Appendix F DTM wiring chart

219

Appendix F
DTM wiring chart
The digital telephone line connects to the Digital Trunk Module (DTM) through the RJ-48c jack on the front of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure DTM RJ-48C port on page 219.
Figure 92 DTM RJ-48C port
DTM

12345678

Bantam jack

RJ-48C jack

RJ-48C pin out

The table DTM RJ-48c port wiring on page 219 and the table DTM line numbering on page 219 list the wiring details for the RJ-48C port.
Table 41 DTM RJ-48c port wiring
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Receive Ring Receive Tip Receive Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Transmit Shield No connection No connection

Table 42 DTM line numbering

Line type T1 PRI E1 Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 065 088 065 087 065 094 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 095 118 095 117 095 124

Installation and Maintenance Guide

220

Appendix F DTM wiring chart

NN40020-302

Appendix G BRIM wiring chart

221

Appendix G
BRIM wiring chart
The digital BRI ISDN lines connects to the BRIM through the RJ-45 jacks on the front of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure BRIM RJ-45 ports on page 221. You can connect up to four BRI ISDN lines to the BRIM. The figure BRIM RJ-45 ports on page 221, the table BRIM RJ-45 port wiring on page 221, and the table BRIM line numbering on page 222 apply to S-Loop and T-Loop connections. S-Loops connect S-Loop devices such as video phones, terminal adapters, and Grp 3 Fax machines. The T-Loops connect to the CO/PSTN. Warning: For a U-loop connection, you must connect the BRIM only to an NT1 supplied by the service provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV) to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.
Figure 93 BRIM RJ-45 ports
BRIM

12345678

RJ-45 pin out RJ-45 jacks

The table BRIM RJ-45 port wiring on page 221 and the table BRIM line numbering on page 222 list the wiring details for the RJ-45 ports.
Table 43 BRIM RJ-45 port wiring
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal No connection No connection + Receive (+Rx) + Transmit (+Tx) Transmit (-Tx) Receive (-Rx) No connection No connection Signal on system side No connection No connection +Tx +Rx Rx Tx No connection No connection

Installation and Maintenance Guide

222

Appendix G BRIM wiring chart

Table 44 BRIM line numbering

Port number 1 2 3 4 Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 065066 067068 069070 071072 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 095096 097098 099100 101 02

NN40020-302

Appendix H ADID wiring chart

223

Appendix H
ADID wiring chart
Analog telephone lines connect to the ADID4 or ADID8 through the RJ-21 connector on the front of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure ADID RJ-21 connector on page 223.
Figure 94 ADID RJ-21 connector
ADID

RJ-21 connector

RJ-21 pin out

The table ADID4 and ADID8 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 223 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the ADID4 and ADID8. Use the first four lines for the ADID4 and use all eight lines for the ADID8.
Table 45 ADID4 and ADID8 RJ-21 connector wiring
Line 1 Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Connection Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 065 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 095

066

096

067

097

068

098

073

103

074

104

075

105

076

106

Installation and Maintenance Guide

224

Appendix H ADID wiring chart

NN40020-302

Appendix I GATM wiring chart

225

Appendix I
GATM wiring chart
Analog telephone lines connect to the GATM4 or GATM8 through the RJ-21 connector on the front of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure GATM RJ-21 connector on page 225.
Figure 95 GATM RJ-21 connector
GATM

RJ-21 connector

RJ-21 pin out

The table GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 225 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the GATM4.
Table 46 GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Line 1 Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 . . . Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection No connection No connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection . . . Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White White-Green Green-White White-Brown Brown-White White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red . . . Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 065 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 095

066

096

067

097

068

098

. . .

. . .

. . .

Installation and Maintenance Guide

226

Appendix I GATM wiring chart

Table 46 GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)

Line Pin 49 24 50 25 Connection No connection No connection Tip Ring Wire color Violet-Brown Brown-Violet Violet-Slate Slate-Violet Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2

Aux

Note: The AUX port supports full data speeds. When the line is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use. If you try to seize the line using the phone, the display shows in use. Also, if a power failure occurs, an analog set on line 1 activates (powered by the CO).

The table GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 226 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the GATM8.
Table 47 GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection No connection No connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection No connection No connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection No connection No connection Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White White-Green Green-White White-Brown Brown-White White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red Red-Green Green-Red Red-Brown Brown-Red Red-Slate Slate-Red Black-Blue Blue-Black Black-Orange Orange-Black Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 065 066 067 068 073 074 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 095 096 097 098 103 104

NN40020-302

Appendix I GATM wiring chart

227

Table 47 GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)

Line 7 8 . . . Aux (see Note) Pin 38 13 39 14 40 15 . . . 49 24 50 25 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection . . . No connection No connection Tip Ring Wire color Black-Green Green-Black Black-Brown Brown-Black Black-Slate Slate-Black . . . Violet-Brown Brown-Violet Violet-Slate Slate-Violet Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 075 076 . . . Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 105 106 . . .

Note: The AUX port supports full data speeds. When the line is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use. If you try to seize the line using the phone, the display shows in use. Also, if a power failure occurs, an analog set on line 1 activates (powered by the CO).

Installation and Maintenance Guide

228

Appendix I GATM wiring chart

NN40020-302

Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts

229

Appendix J
4x16 wiring charts
You can connect up to 4 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the 4x16 media bay module (MBM). The analog telephones lines connect to the 4x16 through the RJ-11 jacks (labeled 1 to 4) on the front of the MBM. Do not connect analog telephone lines to the auxiliary jack on the front of the media bay module. These jacks are intended for analog telephones designated as emergency telephones. See the figure 4x16 connectors on page 229. The digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, connect to the RJ-21 connector on the front of the 4x16.
Figure 96 4x16 connectors
4x16 RJ-21 connector

RJ-21 pin out

RJ-11 jacks
654321

RJ-11 pin out

The table 4x16 RJ-11 port wiring on page 229 and the table 4x16 default line numbering on page 230 list the wiring details for the RJ-11 jacks on the 4x16. This wiring applies to the numbered ports and the Aux ports.
Table 48 4x16 RJ-11 port wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Pin 1 2 3 4 Signal No connection No connection Ring Tip

Installation and Maintenance Guide

230

Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts

Table 48 4x16 RJ-11 port wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)

Pin 5 6 Signal No connection No connection

Table 49 4x16 default line numbering

Port number 1 2 3 4 Default line number on Expansion port 1 065 066 067 068 Default line number on Expansion port 2 095 096 097 098

The table 4x16 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 230 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the 4x16.
Table 50 4x16 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set 1 Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White White-Green Green-White White-Brown Brown-White White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red Red-Green Green-Red Red-Brown Brown-Red Default DN on Expansion port 1 253 Default DN on Expansion port 2 285

254

286

255

287

256

288

257

289

258

290

259

291

260

292

261

293

NN40020-302

Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts

231

Table 50 4x16 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)

Set 10 Pin 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 . . . 50 25 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection . . . No connection No connection Wire color Red-Slate Slate-Red Black-Blue Blue-Black Black-Orange Orange-Black Black-Green Green-Black Black-Brown Brown-Black Black-Slate Slate-Black Yellow-Blue Blue-Yellow Yellow-Orange Orange-Yellow . . . Violet-Slate Slate-Violet Default DN on Expansion port 1 262 Default DN on Expansion port 2 294

11

263

295

12

264

296

13

265

297

14

266

298

15

267

299

16

268

300

. . .

. . .

. . .

Installation and Maintenance Guide

232

Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts

NN40020-302

Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts

233

Appendix K
G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts
You can connect 4 or 8 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the G4x16 or G8x16 media bay module (MBM). The analog telephones lines connect to the G4x16 or G8x16 through the lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector on the front of the MBM. See the figure G4x16/G8x16 connectors on page 233. The digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, connect to the upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector on the front of the G4x16 or G8x16 MBM.
Figure 97 G4x16/G8x16 connectors

RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 16 digital telephones RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines

RJ-21 pin out

The table G4x16/G8x16 MBM upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for digital telephones on page 233 lists the wiring details for the upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector, and the table G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for analog PSTN lines on page 235 lists the wiring details for the lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector on the G4x16 and G8x16 MBMs.
Table 51 G4x16/G8x16 MBM upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for digital telephones (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set 1 Pin 26 1 2 27 2 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White Default DN on Expansion port 1 253 Default DN on Expansion port 2 285

254

286

Installation and Maintenance Guide

234

Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts

Table 51 G4x16/G8x16 MBM upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for digital telephones (Sheet 2 of 2)
Set 3 Pin 28 3 4 29 4 5 30 5 6 31 6 7 32 7 8 33 8 9 34 9 10 35 10 11 36 11 12 37 12 13 38 13 14 39 14 15 40 15 16 41 16 42 17
. . . . . .

Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection
. . .

Wire color White-Green Green-White White-Brown Brown-White White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red Red-Green Green-Red Red-Brown Brown-Red Red-Slate Slate-Red Black-Blue Blue-Black Black-Orange Orange-Black Black-Green Green-Black Black-Brown Brown-Black Black-Slate Slate-Black Yellow-Blue Blue-Yellow Yellow-Orange Orange-Yellow
. . .

Default DN on Expansion port 1 255

Default DN on Expansion port 2 287

256

288

257

289

258

290

259

291

260

292

261

293

262

294

263

295

264

296

265

297

266

298

267

299

268

300

. . . . . .

50 25

No connection No connection

Violet-Slate Slate-Violet

NN40020-302

Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts

235

Table 52 G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for analog PSTN lines (Sheet 1 of 2)
Line 1 2 3 4 Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 5 6 7 8 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15
. . . . . .

Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection No connection No connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection No connection No connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection No connection No connection Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection
. . .

Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White White-Green Green-White White-Brown Brown-White White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red Red-Green Green-Red Red-Brown Brown-Red Red-Slate Slate-Red Black-Blue Blue-Black Black-Orange Orange-Black Black-Green Green-Black Black-Brown Brown-Black Black-Slate Slate-Black
. . .

Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 065 066 067 068

Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 095 096 097 098

The following part of the wiring chart applies only to the G8x16 MBM. 073 074 075 076 103 104 105 106

The following part of the wiring chart applies to both the G4x16 and G8x16 MBMs.
. . . . . .

49 24

No connection No connection

Violet-Brown Brown-Violet

Installation and Maintenance Guide

236

Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts

Table 52 G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for analog PSTN lines (Sheet 2 of 2)
Line Aux (see Note) Pin 50 25 Connection Tip Ring Wire color Violet-Slate Slate-Violet Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2

Note: The Aux port supports full data speeds. When the line is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone. If you try to seize the line using the phone, the display shows in use. Also, if a power failure occurs, an analog set on line 1 activates (powered by the CO).

NN40020-302

Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts

237

Appendix L
DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts
Digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, connect to the Digital Station Module (DSM16 or DSM32) through the RJ-21 connectors on the front of the media bay module. The DSM16 has a single RJ-21 connector and the DSM32 has two RJ-21 connectors. See the figure DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connectors on page 237.
Figure 98 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connectors
DSM16 DSM32

RJ-21 connector

RJ-21 connectors

RJ-21 pin out

The table DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 237 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connectors on the DSM16 and DSM32.
Table 53 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 3)
Default DN on Expansion port 1 DSM16 or Lower DSM32 RJ-21 Upper DSM32 RJ-21 Default DN on Expansion port 2 DSM16 or Lower DSM32 RJ-21 Upper DSM32 RJ-21

Port

Port

Port

Set 1

Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3

Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring

Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White White-Green Green-White

237

501

253

601

269

701

285

801

238

502

254

602

270

702

286

802

239

503

255

603

271

703

287

803

Installation and Maintenance Guide

Port

238

Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts

Table 53 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 3)

Default DN on Expansion port 1 DSM16 or Lower DSM32 RJ-21 Upper DSM32 RJ-21 Default DN on Expansion port 2 DSM16 or Lower DSM32 RJ-21 Upper DSM32 RJ-21

Port

Port

Port

Set 4

Pin 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42

Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring No connection No connection . . .

Wire color White-Brown Brown-White White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red Red-Green Green-Red Red-Brown Brown-Red Red-Slate Slate-Red Black-Blue Blue-Black Black-Orange Orange-Black Black-Green Green-Black Black-Brown Brown-Black Black-Slate Slate-Black Yellow-Blue Blue-Yellow Yellow-Orange

240

504

256

604

272

704

288

804

241

505

257

605

273

705

289

805

242

506

258

606

274

706

290

806

243

507

259

607

275

707

291

807

244

508

260

608

276

708

292

808

245

509

261

609

277

709

293

809

10

246

510

262

610

278

710

294

810

11

247

511

263

611

279

711

295

811

12

248

512

264

612

280

712

296

812

13

249

513

265

613

281

713

297

813

14

250

514

266

614

282

714

298

814

15

251

515

267

615

283

715

299

815

16

252

516

268

616

284

716

300

816

17 . . . . . .

Orange-Yellow . . . . . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

NN40020-302

Port

Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts

239

Table 53 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 3 of 3)

Default DN on Expansion port 1 DSM16 or Lower DSM32 RJ-21 Upper DSM32 RJ-21 Default DN on Expansion port 2 DSM16 or Lower DSM32 RJ-21 Upper DSM32 RJ-21

Port

Port

Port

Set

Pin 50

Connection No connection No connection

Wire color Violet-Slate

25

Slate-Violet

Installation and Maintenance Guide

Port

240

Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts

NN40020-302

Appendix M ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart

241

Appendix M
ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart
Analog telephony devices, such as single line telephones, modems and Fax machines, connect to the Analog Station Module (ASM) through the RJ-21 connector on the front of the media bay module. See the figure ASM RJ-21 connector on page 241.
Figure 99 ASM RJ-21 connector
GASM

RJ-21 pin out RJ-21 connector

The table ASM RJ-21 connector wiring on page 241 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the ASM.
Table 54 ASM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set 1 Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 Connection Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Wire color White-Blue Blue-White White-Orange Orange-White White-Green Green-White White-Brown Brown-White White-Slate Slate-White Red-Blue Blue-Red Red-Orange Orange-Red Red-Green Green-Red Default DN on Expansion port 1 237 Default DN on Expansion port 2 269

238

270

239

271

240

272

241

273

242

274

243

275

244

276

Installation and Maintenance Guide

242

Appendix M ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart

Table 54 ASM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)

Set . . . Pin 34 9 . . . 50 25 Connection No connection No connection . . . No connection No connection Wire color Red-Brown Brown-Red . . . Violet-Slate Slate-Violet Default DN on Expansion port 1 . . . Default DN on Expansion port 2 . . .

NN40020-302

243

Appendix N
Market profile attributes
This section describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes. These attributes are derived from the market profile selected when you configure the system. Each market profile uses a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical area in which you deploy the system. This section covers the following main topics: Interface availability on page 243 Tones and cadences on page 245 Core parameters for market profiles on page 253 Analog Trunk parameters on page 268 GASM8 parameters on page 274 GASI parameters on page 277 ATA2 parameters on page 279 Voicemail on page 282 ISDN line services on page 285 Analog and digital trunk types on page 285

Interface availability
Some of the BCM50 interfaces are customized for a specific region and are not available to all market profiles. Refer to the following tables for a list of interfaces available within each market profile: Analog interface availability by market profile on page 244 Digital interface availability by market profile on page 244

Analog interfaces
Analog interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles: Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, Spain, Sweden, and Switzerland. The symbols in the table Analog interface availability by market profile on page 244 are defined as follows: indicates full support. The interface is available and is localized in the market profile. indicates that functionality and support is limited. The interface is available in the market profile, but is not localized.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

244

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 55 Analog interface availability by market profile

Legacy New G4x16 ASM/ CTM4/ GATM4/ GATM4/ Legacy G8x16 ASM8 ASM8+ GASM8 GASI CTM8 GATM8 GATM8 4X16 (new) GATI ADID

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong Ireland Mexico New Zealand North America Poland PRC Taiwan United Kingdom

Digital interfaces
The table Digital interface availability by market profile on page 244 lists the digital interfaces supported in each market profile. Note that the Digital Station Interface and the BRI cNIC are onboard interfaces.
Table 56 Digital interface availability by market profile (Sheet 1 of 2)
DSM16+/ DSM32+ Digital station interface BRI cNIC

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Brazil

BRI

DTM R2MFC

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

245

Table 56 Digital interface availability by market profile (Sheet 2 of 2)

DSM16+/ DSM32+ Digital station interface BRI cNIC

Market profile
CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong Ireland Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland PRC Russia South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom

BRI

DTM R2MFC

Tones and cadences

The following tables provide region-specific settings for tones and cadences. Note: The sum of two tones is indicated by A+B. The sequence of two tones is indicated by A:B.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

246

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Localized, Dial, and Quiet Dial on page 246 Special Dial, Overflow, and Busy on page 247 Ring Back, Aux Ring, Async Ring Back on page 249 Hold, Warble, Intrusion on page 250 Reorder, 1 kHz on page 251

Table 57 Localized, Dial, and Quiet Dial (Sheet 1 of 2)

Dial Level per Tone (dBm0)
-13 -16 -11.5 -17 -17 -17 -11.5 -11.5 -11.5

Quiet Dial Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-21 -20 -18 -25 -25 -25 -19.5 -17.5 -17.5 Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous 200 ms on 275 ms off 200 ms on 275 ms off 200 ms on 875 ms off Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark France Germany

Localized
Yes Yes Yes No (North America) Yes No (North America) Yes Yes Yes

Tones (Hz)
400 330+440 425 440+350 440+350 440+350 425 440 425

Cadence
Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous 200 ms on 275 ms off 200 ms on 275 ms off 200 ms on 875 ms off Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous

Tones (Hz)
400 330+440 425 440+350 440+350 440+350 425 400 425

Global Holland Hong Kong Ireland Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland PRC Russia South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan

No (North America) Yes Yes Yes Yes No (North America) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

440+350 425 440+350 425 350+425 440+350 400 440+350 425 425 450 425 367+400 425 425 425 400

-17 -11.5 -11.5 -14.5 -8.5 -17 -13 -17 -11.5 -17.5 -11.5 -10 -17 -11.5 -11.5 -11.5 -12

440+350 425 440+350 425 350+425 440+350 400 440+350 425 425 450 425 367+400 425 425 425 400

-25 -19.5 -17.6 -17.5 -17.5 -25 -21 -25 -17.5 -19.5 -17.5 -13 -25 -17.5 -17.5 -17.5 -20

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

247

Table 57 Localized, Dial, and Quiet Dial (Sheet 2 of 2)

Dial Level per Tone (dBm0)
-17.5

Quiet Dial Level per Tone Cadence (dBm0)

-14.5 Continuous

Market profile
United Kingdom

Localized
Yes

Tones (Hz)
440+350

Cadence
Continuous

Tones (Hz)
440+350

Table 58 Special Dial, Overflow, and Busy (Sheet 1 of 2)

Special Dial Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence
-13 -16 100 ms on 900 ms off 100 ms on 900 ms off

Overflow Level per Tone (dBm0)

-13 -16

Busy Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-13 -15 375 ms on 375 ms off 375 ms on 375 ms off

Market profile
Australia Bahrain

Tones (Hz)
400 330+400

Tones (Hz)
800 425

Cadence
100 ms on 100 ms off 400 ms on 350 ms off 225 ms on 525 ms off 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1s off 250 ms on 250 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1s off 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1 s off 240 ms on 240 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1 s off 500 ms on 500 ms off 450 ms on 450 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off

Tones (Hz)
425 425

Brazil

425

-11.5

500 ms on 500 ms off

950: 1400: -18 1800: silence 480+620 480+620 480+620 950:1400: 1800: silence 950:1400: 1800: silence 425 480+620 -21 -21 -21 -25

425

-11.5

250 ms on 250 ms off

CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark

Silence Silence Silence Silence

480+620 480+620 480+620 425

-21 -21 -21 -11.5

500 ms on 500 ms off 500 ms on 500 ms off 500 ms on 500 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off

France

Silence

-25: -11.5: -25: silence -11.5 -21

440

-11.5

500 ms on 500 ms off

Germany Global Holland

Silence Silence 425 -11.5 500 ms on 50 ms off

425 480+620 425

-11.5 -21 -11.5

150 ms on 475 ms off 500 ms on 500 ms off 500 ms on 500 ms off

950: 1400: -18 1800: silence 480+620 -14.5 -17.5 -8 -21

Hong Kong Ireland Italy Mexico

Silence 400:432 Silence Silence -14.5 0.4 s:0.4 s

480+620 425 425 480+620

-14.5 -17.5 -8 -21

500 ms on 500 ms off 450 ms on 450 ms off 500 ms on 500 ms off 500 ms on 500 ms off

425 425 480+620

Installation and Maintenance Guide

248

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 58 Special Dial, Overflow, and Busy (Sheet 2 of 2)

Special Dial Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence
-13 0.1 s:0.1 s

Overflow Level per Tone (dBm0)

-11.5

Busy Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-11.5 500 ms on 500 ms off

Market profile
New Zealand

Tones (Hz)
400: silence

Tones (Hz)
400

Cadence
75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 400 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1.0 s 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1.0 s 400 ms on, 400 ms off 160 ms on, 160 ms off 250 ms on, 250 ms off 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1.0 s 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1.0 s 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1.0 s 333 ms: 333 ms: 333 ms: 1.0 s Continuous

Tones (Hz)
400

North America Norway

Silence Silence

480+620 950:1400: 1800: silence 950:1400: 1800: silence 450 425 400 950:1400: 1800: silence -11.5 320 ms on 25 ms off

-21 -25

480+620 425

-21 -11.5

500 ms on 500 ms off 500 ms on 500 ms off

Poland

Silence

-25

425

-17.5

500 ms on 500 ms off

PRC Russia South Africa Spain

Silence Silence Silence Silence

-11.5 -10 -21 -25

450 425 400 425

-11.5 -10 -21 -11.5

350 ms on 350 ms off 350 ms on, 350 ms off 500 ms on, 500 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off

Sweden

425

950: 1400: -25 1800: silence 950: 1400: -25 1800: silence 950: 1400: -25 1800: silence

425

-11.5

250 ms on 250 ms off

Switzerland

Silence

425

-11.5

500 ms on 500 ms off

Taiwan

Silence

480+620

-21

500 ms on 500 ms off

United Kingdom

440+350: -17.5 440

0.75 s:0.75 s 400

-11.5

400

-11.5

375 ms on 375 ms off

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

249

Table 59 Ring Back, Aux Ring, Async Ring Back (Sheet 1 of 2)

Ring Back Aux Ring Level per Tone (dBm0) Async Ring Back Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence
-14.5 Continuous

Market profile
Australia

Tones (Hz)
400+450

Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-14.5 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2 s off 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off 1 s on 4 s off 2 s on 4 s off 2 s on 4 s off 2 s on 4 s off 1 s on 4 s off 1.5 s on 3.5 s off 1 s on 4 s off 2 s on 4 s off 1 s on 4 s off 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 3 s off 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off 1 s on 4 s off 2 s on 4 s off 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2 s off 2 s on 4 s off 1 s on 4 s off 1s on 4 s off

Tones (Hz)
Silence

Tones Cadence (Hz)

400+450

Bahrain

425

-15

Silence

425

-15

Continuous

Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong

425 440+480 440+480 440+480 425 440 425 440+480 425 440+480

-11.5 -16 -16 -16 -11.5 -11.5 -11.5 -16 -11.5 -11.5

Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence

Silence 440+480 440+480 440+480 Silence 440+450 Silence 440+480 Silence Silence -16 2 s on 4 s off -14.5 Continuous -16 -16 -16 2 s on 4 s off 2 s on 4 s off 2 s on 4 s off

Ireland

400+450

-14.5

Silence

400+450

-14.5

Continuous

Italy Mexico New Zealand

425 440+480 400+450

-8 -16 -14.5

Silence Silence Silence

Silence 440+480 440+480 -16 -14.5 2 s on 4 s off Continuous

North America Norway Poland

440+480 425 425

-16 -11.5 -17.5

Silence Silence Silence

440+480 Silence Silence

-16

2 s on 4 s off

Installation and Maintenance Guide

250

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 59 Ring Back, Aux Ring, Async Ring Back (Sheet 2 of 2)

Ring Back Aux Ring Level per Tone (dBm0) Async Ring Back Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

Market profile
PRC Russia South Africa

Tones (Hz)
450 425 367+400

Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-11.5 -10 -16 1s on 4 s off 1 s on, 4 s off 400ms on, 200ms off, 400ms on, 2s off 1.5 s on 3 s off 1 s on 5 s off 1 s on 4 s off 1 s on 2 s off 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2 s off

Tones (Hz)
Silence Silence Silence

Tones Cadence (Hz)

Silence 425 367+400

-10 -16

Continuous Continuous

Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom

425 425 425 440+480 400+450

-11.5 -11.5 -11.5 -21 -14.5

Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence

Silence Silence Silence 440+480 400+450 -21 -14.5 1 s on 2 s off Continuous

Table 60 Hold, Warble, Intrusion (Sheet 1 of 2)

Hold Warble Level per Tone (dBm0) Intrusion Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence
-13 -16 Continuous Continuous

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark France Germany

Tones (Hz)
400 400 425 440 440 440 Silence 400 425

Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-13 -16 -11.5 -14 -14 -14 Continuous Continuous 0.5 s on 9.5 s off Cadenced by CoreTel Cadenced by CoreTel Cadenced by CoreTel

Tones (Hz)
Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence

Tones Cadence (Hz)

425 400 Silence Silence Silence Silence 425 1400 425

-11.5 -11.5 -11.5

50 ms on 500 ms off Continuous Continuous

-11.5 -11.5

Continuous Continuous

Silence Silence

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

251

Table 60 Hold, Warble, Intrusion (Sheet 2 of 2)

Hold Warble Level per Tone (dBm0) Intrusion Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

Market profile
Global Holland Hong Kong Ireland Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway

Tones (Hz)
440 425 Silence 400 Silence 440 400 400 425

Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-14 -11.5 Cadenced by CoreTel 0.5 s on 9.5 s off

Tones (Hz)
Silence Silence Silence

Tones Cadence (Hz)

Silence Silence 1400 1400 425 Silence 1400 Silence 1400

-11.5 -11.5 -12

Continuous Continuous Continuous

-11.5

Continuous

Silence Silence

-14 -11.5 -14 -11.5

Cadenced by CoreTel Continuous Cadenced by CoreTel 200 ms on 600 ms off 200 ms on 10 s off Continuous

Silence Silence Silence Silence

-11.5

Continuous

-11.5

Continuous

Poland PRC Russia South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom

425 Silence 425 400 Silence Silence Silence 440 400

-17.5

Silence Silence

1400 1400 425 Silence 1400 1400 1400 Silence 1400

-25 -11.5 -10

Continuous Continuous Continuous

-10 -14

Continuous Continuous

Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence

-25 -25 -25

Continuous 0.35s on, 15s off Continuous

-14 -11.5

Continuous Continuous

Silence Silence

-11.5

Continuous

Table 61 Reorder, 1 kHz (Sheet 1 of 3)

Reorder Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence
-13: off: -23: off -16 375 ms on 375 ms off 75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 400 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off

1 kHz Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

Market profile
Australia Bahrain

Tones (Hz)
425 400

Tones (Hz)
N/A N/A

Brazil

425

-11.5

N/A

Installation and Maintenance Guide

252

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 61 Reorder, 1 kHz (Sheet 2 of 3)

Reorder Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence
-21 -21 -21 250 ms on 250 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off

1 kHz Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

-14 -14 -14 Continuous Continuous Continuous

Market profile
CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong Ireland

Tones (Hz)
480+620 480+620 480+620 Silence Silence 425 480+620 425 480+620 200

Tones (Hz)
1004 1004 1004 N/A N/A

-11.5 - 21 -11.5 -14.5 -11.5: Silence: -17.5: Silence -8 -21 -11.5: Silence: -17.5: Silence -21 -11.5 -17.5 -11.5

240 ms on 240 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 400 ms on 350 ms off 225 ms on 525 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 400 ms on 350 ms off 225 ms on 525 ms off 250 ms on 250 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 700 ms on 700 ms off

N/A 1004 N/A N/A N/A -14 Continuous

Italy Mexico New Zealand

425 480+620 400

N/A 1004 N/A -14 Continuous

North America Norway Poland PRC Russia South Africa Spain

480+620 425 425 450 Silence 400 425

1004 N/A N/A N/A N/A

-14

Continuous

-21 -11.5

250ms on, 250ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 200 ms on 600 ms off 250 ms on 750 ms off

N/A N/A

Sweden

425

-11.5

N/A

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

253

Table 61 Reorder, 1 kHz (Sheet 3 of 3)

Reorder Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence
-11.5 -21 -11.5: Silence: -17.5: Silence 200 ms on 200 ms off 300 ms on 300 ms off 400 ms on 350 ms off 225 ms on 525 ms off

1 kHz Level per Tone (dBm0) Cadence

Market profile
Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom

Tones (Hz)
425 480+620 400

Tones (Hz)
N/A N/A N/A

Core parameters for market profiles

The core parameters for the available market profiles are provided in the following tables: Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters on page 253 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters on page 256 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland on page 259 Russia and South Africa parameters on page 262 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters on page 265

Table 62 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile Functionality
Access codes

Attribute
Direct dial digit

Australia
9

Bahrain
0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102

Brazil
9 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102

CALA
0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102

Canada
0 9 ISDN

Caribbean Denmark
0 0 ISDN 0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102

Dest code for 0 default route Digital trunking protocols Protocols BRI trunk protocol variants BRI S-loop protocol variant PRI trunk protocol variants ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102

NI-2

NI-2

NI-2

NI-2

ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

NI-2 DMS100 DMS250 4ESS MCDN GATv1 GATv2

NI-2 DMS100 DMS250 4ESS MCDN GATv1 GATv2

ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

Global analog trunk versions

GATv1 GATv2

GATv2

GATv1 GATv2

GATv1 GATv2

N/A

Installation and Maintenance Guide

254

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 62 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile Functionality Attribute
Conference tone supported Held line reminder Telephony feature settings Delay ring transfer Transfer callback timeout Network callback Host delay (ms) Link time (ms) Target line if busy setting BRI ISDN Answer Mode Companding law System settings DTI carrier type Number of rings in a cycle M7000 set supported Mode Hunt groups

Australia
Yes

Bahrain
No

Brazil
Yes

CALA
Yes

Canada
No

Caribbean Denmark
Yes No

After 30 seconds After 15 rings After 15 rings 30 1000 N/A Busy Manual

Off

Off

Off

Off After 4 rings After 4 rings N/A 1000 600 Prime Manual

Off After 4 rings After 4 rings

Off After 4 rings After 4 rings

After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings

30 1000 600 Prime Manual

30 1000 300 Prime Manual

30 1000 600 Prime Manual

30 1000 600 Prime Manual

30 1000 600 Prime Manual

A-law E1 2

A-law E1 1

A-law E1 1

A-law E1 1

mu-law T1 1

mu-law T1 1

A-law E1 1

Yes Sequential

Yes Broadcast

Yes Broadcast

Yes Broadcast

No Broadcast

Yes Broadcast

Yes Broadcast

Default delay 4 ring cycles Queue timeout (sec) If busy Night 60

4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 60 60

4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 60 60

4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 60 60

Busy tone Start 17:00 End 08:00 Start 00:00 End 00:00 Start 00:00 End 00:00

Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Busy tone

Busy tone

Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Start 23:00 Start 23:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00 End 13:00

Service times

Evening Lunch

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

255

Table 62 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile Functionality Attribute
Ringing service mode Ringing service trunk ans Restriction service mode Service modes Restriction global overrides Restriction filter 01

Australia
Off

Bahrain
Off

Brazil
Off

CALA
Off

Canada
Off

Caribbean Denmark
Off Off

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

000 131440 0(013), 1(13, 1800)

N/A

190

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off

0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off

0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off

0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off

0, N/A 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off N/A N/A Off

Restriction filter 05 Restriction filter 06 Routing service mode Routing service overflow Public DN Public DN lengths

00, 1(13, 11, 1800) * Off

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Default(7)

Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) Variable

Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) Variable

Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) Variable

Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) N/A

Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) N/A

Default(8), 00(17), 1(3), 16(5), 17(4), 18(4)

Public OLI

Unknown number length Local number length National number length

N/A

Variable

Variable

Variable

Variable

Variable

Variable

Variable

Variable

10

10

Variable

Installation and Maintenance Guide

256

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 62 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile Functionality Attribute
Handsfree Set capabilities

Australia
Auto

Bahrain
Auto None Disabled

Brazil
Auto None Disabled

CALA
Auto None Disabled

Canada
Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Caribbean Denmark
Auto None Disabled Disabled (4) Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Pickup group 1 Allow redirect Call forward delay Enabled

Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4)

Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value. Dial tone detection Set preferences Language (first is default) Analog VSC (tone) ONN blocking Analog VSC (pulse) BRI VSC BRI per loop Release reason Release text Release code DTMF parameters Enabled UK English Enabled English French Spanish Turkish None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80 Enabled Portuguese English Spanish None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80 Enabled Spanish English French None None None SuprsBit None Off 120 1.5 80 Enabled English French Spanish None None None SuprsBit None Off 120 1.5 80 Enabled English French Spanish None None None SuprsBit None Off 120 1.5 80 Enabled Danish English Norwegian Swedish None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80

1831 1831 None SuprsBit Simple On

Tone 80 duration (ms) Pause time (ms) Interdigit time (ms) 3.5 100

Table 63 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile Hong Kong
0 9

Functionality
Access codes

Attribute
Direct dial digit Dest code for default route

France
9 0

Germany
9 0

Global
0 9

Holland
0 9

Ireland
9 0

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

257

Table 63 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile Hong Kong
ISDN DASS2 DPNSS HKTA2015 ETSI-102 HkTA2015 MCDN GATv1 GATv2 No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings N/A 1000 600 Prime Manual mu-law T1 1 No Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Functionality

Attribute
Digital trunking protocols

France
ISDN DASS2 DPNSS

Germany
ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN N/A Yes Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Manual A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Global
ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN GATv1 GATv2 No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 600 Prime Manual A-law E1 1 Yes Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Holland
ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN N/A No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 600 Prime Manual A-law E1 1 Yes Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Ireland
ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 + BTNR191 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN GATv1 GATv2 Yes Immediate After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Auto A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Protocols

BRI trunk protocol ETSI-403 variants ETSI-QSIG BRI S-loop protocol variant ETSI-102

PRI trunk protocol ETSI-403 variants ETSI-QSIG MCDN Global analog trunk versions Conference tone supported N/A No

Held line reminder Off Delay ring transfer After 4 rings Telephony feature settings Transfer callback timeout Network callback Host delay (ms) Link time (ms) Target line if busy setting BRI ISDN Answer Mode Companding law DTI carrier type System settings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Manual A-law E1

Number of rings in 2 a cycle M7000 set supported Mode Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Hunt groups

Default delay Queue timeout (sec) If busy Night

Service times

Evening Lunch

Installation and Maintenance Guide

258

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 63 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile Hong Kong
Off Yes Off N/A 00***, 170, 172, 173, 1747, 1760, 1761, 1766, 1770, 1771, 1772, 1775, 1778, 1783, 1788, 900

Functionality

Attribute
Ringing service mode Ringing service trunk ans Restriction service mode Restriction global overrides

France
Manual Yes Off N/A N/A

Germany
Manual Yes Off N/A N/A

Global
Off Yes Off N/A 0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off No Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Holland
Off Yes Off N/A N/A

Ireland
Manual Yes Off N/A 0(0800), 1

Service modes

Restriction filter 01

Restriction filter 05 Restriction filter 06 Routing service mode Routing service overflow Public DN

N/A N/A Off No

N/A N/A Off No Default(25)

N/A N/A Off No Default(7)

N/A N/A Off No Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

010, 1, 00 * Off No Default(8), 0(11) 00(17), 1(3), 118(6), 9(3)

Public DN lengths Default(25)

Unknown number length Public OLI Local number length National number length Handsfree Set capabilities Pickup group Allow redirect

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Variable Variable Variable None None Disabled Disabled (4)

Call forward delay Disabled (4)

Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value. Dial tone detection Set preferences Language (first is default) Enabled EuroFrench English Enabled German English Enabled English French Spanish Turkish Enabled Dutch English EuroFrench Enabled English French Spanish Enabled UK English

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

259

Table 63 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile Hong Kong
None None None SuprsBit None Off 120 1.5 80

Functionality

Attribute
Analog VSC (tone)

France
None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 3.5 100

Germany
None None None SuprsBit Detailed Off 120 3.5 100

Global
None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80

Holland
None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80

Ireland
141 141 141 SrvcCode Detailed Off 120 3.5 100

ONN blocking

Analog VSC (pulse) BRI VSC BRI per loop

Release reason

Release text Release code

Tone duration DTMF parameters (ms) Pause time (ms) Interdigit time (ms)

Table 64 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile New Zealand
0 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 + BTNR191 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

Functionality
Access codes

Attribute
Direct dial digit Dest code for default route Digital trunking protocols

Italy
9 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS

Mexico
0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

North America
0 9 ISDN

Norway
9 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

Poland
0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN

Protocols

BRI trunk protocol ETSI-102 variants ETSI-QSIG BRI S-loop protocol variant ETSI-102

NI-2 NI-2 NI-2 DMS100 DMS250 4ESS MCDN GATv1 GATv2

PRI trunk protocol ETSI-102 variants ETSI-QSIG MCDN

Global analog trunk versions

N/A

GATv1 GATv2

N/A

N/A

GATv1 GATv2

Installation and Maintenance Guide

260

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 64 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile New Zealand
Yes Immediate After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Auto A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Functionality

Attribute
Conference tone supported

Italy
Yes

Mexico
No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 600 Prime Manual A-law E1 1 Yes Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

North America
No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings N/A 1000 600 Prime Manual mu-law T1 1 No Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Norway
No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Auto A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Poland
Yes After 30 seconds After 15 rings After 15 rings 30 1000 N/A Busy Manual A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 08:00 Start 00:00 End 00:00 Start 00:00 End 00:00

Held line reminder Off Delay ring transfer After 4 rings Telephony feature settings Transfer callback timeout Network callback Host delay (ms) Link time (ms) Target line if busy setting BRI ISDN Answer Mode Companding law DTI carrier type System settings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Manual A-law E1

Number of rings in 2 a cycle M7000 set supported Mode Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Hunt groups

Default delay Queue timeout (sec) If busy Night

Service times

Evening Lunch

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

261

Table 64 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile New Zealand
Manual Yes Off 999 112 0(0800), 1

Functionality

Attribute
Ringing service mode Ringing service trunk ans Restriction service mode Restriction global overrides

Italy
Manual Yes Off N/A N/A

Mexico
Off Yes Off N/A 0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off No Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

North America
Off Yes Off N/A 0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off No Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) N/A 7 10 Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Norway
Manual Yes Off N/A N/A

Poland
Off Yes Off 112 990 N/A

Service modes

Restriction filter 01

Restriction filter 05 Restriction filter 06 Routing service mode Routing service overflow Public DN

N/A N/A Off No

010, 1, 00 * Off No Default(8), 0(11) 00(17), 1(3), 118(6), 9(3)

N/A N/A Off No Default(25)

N/A N/A Off No Default(7)

Public DN lengths Default(25)

Unknown number length Public OLI Local number length National number length Handsfree Set capabilities Pickup group Allow redirect

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled

Variable Variable Variable None None Disabled Disabled (4)

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Variable Variable Variable Auto 0 Disabled Disabled (4)

Call forward delay Disabled (4)

Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value. Dial tone detection Set preferences Language (first is default) Enabled Italian English Enabled English French Spanish Turkish Enabled UKEnglish Enabled English French Spanish Enabled Norwegian English Swedish Danish Enabled Polish EuroFrench English Czech

Installation and Maintenance Guide

262

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 64 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile New Zealand
141 141 141 SrvcCode Detailed Off 120 3.5 100

Functionality

Attribute
Analog VSC (tone)

Italy
None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 3.5 100

Mexico
None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80

North America
None None None SuprsBit None Off 120 1.5 80

Norway
None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 3.5 100

Poland
1831 1831 None SuprsBit Simple On 110 1.5 80

ONN blocking

Analog VSC (pulse) BRI VSC BRI per loop

Release reason

Release text Release code

DTMF parameters

Tone duration (ms) Pause time (ms) Interdigit time (ms)

Table 65 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)

Market profile Functionality
Access codes

Attribute
Direct dial digit Dest code for default route Digital trunking protocols BRI trunk protocol variants BRI S-loop protocol variant PRI trunk protocol variants Global analog trunk versions

Russia
0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN GATv2

South Africa
9 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN GATv2

Protocols

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

263

Table 65 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)

Market profile Functionality Attribute
Conference tone supported

Russia
No

South Africa
Yes After 30 s After 15 rings After 15 rings 30 1000 N/A Busy Auto A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 rings 60 sec Busy tone Start 17:00 End 08:00 Start 00:00 End 00:00 Start 00:00 End 00:00

Held line reminder Off Delay ring transfer After 4 rings Telephony feature settings Transfer callback timeout Network callback Host delay (ms) Link time (ms) Target line if busy setting BRI ISDN Answer Mode Companding law DTI carrier type System settings After 4 rings 30 1000 600 Prime Manual A-law E1

Number of rings in 1 a cycle M7000 set supported Mode Yes Broadcast 4 rings 60 sec Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Hunt groups

Default delay Queue timeout If busy Night

Service times

Evening Lunch

Installation and Maintenance Guide

264

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 65 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)

Market profile Functionality Attribute
Ringing service mode Ringing service trunk ans

Russia
Off Yes

South Africa
Off Yes Off 000 131440 0(013), 1(13,1800)

Restriction service Off mode Restriction global overrides Service modes N/A

Restriction filter 01 0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 Restriction filter 05 N/A

00, 1 (13,11,1800) * Off No Default (7)

Restriction filter 06 N/A Routing service mode Routing service overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Off No Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3) Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Enabled

Unknown number length Public OLI Local number length National number length Handsfree Set capabilities Pickup group Allow redirect Call forward delay

N/A 8 9 Auto 1 Enabled Enabled

Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value. Dial tone detection Set preferences Language (first is default) Enabled English French Spanish Turkish Enabled UIKEnglish

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

265

Table 65 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)

Market profile Functionality Attribute
Analog VSC (tone) ONN blocking Analog VSC (pulse) BRI VSC BRI per loop Release reason Release text Release code Tone duration DTMF parameters (ms) Pause time (ms)

Russia
None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5

South Africa
1831 1831 None SuprsBit Simple On 80 3.5 100

Interdigit time (ms) 80

Table 66 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile United Kingdom
0 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 + BTNR191 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN GATv1 GATv2

Functionality
Access codes

Attribute
Direct dial digit Dest code for default route Digital trunking protocols

PRC
0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS

Spain
9 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN N/A

Sweden
0 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN N/A

Switzerland Taiwan
9 0 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG ETSI-102 ETSI-403 ETSI-QSIG MCDN N/A 0 9 ISDN DASS2 DPNSS ITU-T ETSI-102 ITU-T MCDN GATv1 GATv2

Protocols

BRI trunk protocol ETSI-403 variants ETSI-QSIG BRI S-loop protocol variant ETSI-102

PRI trunk protocol ETSI-403 variants ETSI-QSIG MCDN Global analog trunk versions GATv1 GATv2

Installation and Maintenance Guide

266

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 66 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile United Kingdom
Yes Immediate After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Auto A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 sec Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Functionality

Attribute
Conference tone supported Held line reminder Delay ring transfer Transfer callback timeout Network callback Host delay (ms) Link time (ms) Target line if busy setting

PRC
No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 600 Prime

Spain
No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Auto A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 sec Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Sweden
No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 600 Prime Manual A-law E1 1 Yes Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 sec Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Switzerland Taiwan
No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings 30 1000 N/A PBX > Busy DID > Prime Auto A-law E1 2 Yes Sequential 4 ring cycles 60 sec Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00 No Off After 4 rings After 4 rings N/A 1000 600 Prime Manual mu-law T1 1 Yes Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 sec Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

Telephony feature settings

BRI ISDN Answer Manual Mode Companding law DTI carrier type System settings Number of rings in a cycle M7000 set supported Mode Hunt groups Default delay Queue timeout If busy Night Service times Evening Lunch A-law E1 1 Yes Broadcast 4 ring cycles 60 sec Busy tone Start 23:00 End 07:00 Start 17:00 End 23:00 Start 12:00 End 13:00

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

267

Table 66 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile United Kingdom
Manual Yes Off 999 112 0(0800), 1

Functionality

Attribute
Ringing service mode Ringing service trunk ans Restriction service mode Restriction global overrides

PRC
Off Yes Off N/A 0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off No

Spain
Manual Yes Off N/A N/A

Sweden
Off Yes Off N/A N/A

Switzerland Taiwan
Manual Yes Off N/A N/A Off Yes Off N/A 0, 1(1800, 1866, 1877, 1888), 911(911), 411, 976, 1976, 1***976, 1900, 1***900, 5551212 N/A N/A Off No Default(7), 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3)

Service modes

Restriction filter 01

Restriction filter 05 Restriction filter 06 Routing service mode Routing service overflow Public DN

N/A N/A Off No

N/A N/A Off No Default(11), 00(17), 01(10), 02(10), 020(9), 0200(10), 02000(7), 020000(10), 0201(10), 02010(9), 07(10), 071(11), 0718(10), 072(11), 077(11), 09(11), 1(3) Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

N/A N/A Off No Default(25)

010, 1, 00 * Off No Default(8), 0(11) 00(17), 1(3), 118(6), 9(3)

Public DN lengths Default(7), Default(25) 0(11), 00(12), 01(17), 011(18), 1(11), 411(3), 911(3)

Unknown number Variable length Public OLI Local number length National number length Handsfree Set capabilities Pickup group Allow redirect Variable Variable Auto None Disabled

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Variable Variable Variable Auto None Disabled Disabled (4)

Variable Variable Variable None None Disabled Disabled (4)

Call forward delay Disabled (4)

Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

268

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 66 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile United Kingdom
Enabled UKEnglish

Functionality
Dial tone detection Set preferences

Attribute

PRC
Enabled

Spain
Enabled EuroSpanish English Portuguese None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 3.5 100

Sweden
Enabled Swedish English Norwegian Danish None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80

Switzerland Taiwan
Enabled German English EuroFrench Italian None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 3.5 100 Enabled English French Spanish None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80

Language (first is default)

English French Spanish Turkish None None None SuprsBit Simple On 120 1.5 80

Analog VSC (tone) ONN blocking Analog VSC (pulse) BRI VSC BRI per loop Release reason Release text Release code DTMF parameters Tone duration (ms) Pause time (ms) Interdigit time (ms)

141 141 141 SrvcCode Detailed Off 120 3.5 100

Analog Trunk parameters

The table Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters on page 269 contains information for the onboard GATI interface, the G4x16/G8x16 MBM (NT5B42AAABE5/ NT5B42AAACE5), the new GATM4/8 MBM (NT5B44BAABE5/NT5B44AAABE5), and the legacy GATM4/8 MBM (NT5B44BAAA/NT5B44AAAA) in a BCM50R3 system. Differences between the interfaces are noted in this table. The 4x16 (NT5B42AAAA) and CTM4/8 MBMs are not covered in this table. Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles: Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, Spain, Sweden, and Switzerland. The analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables: Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters on page 269 Transmission parameters on page 271 Call supervision parameters on page 272 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters on page 273

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

269

Table 67 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 1 of 3)

Differences PSTN Standards, Specifications between GATI, Referenced Pulse Dialing (ms) G4x16/G8x16, New Break Make Interdigit GATM4/8, and time time time Legacy GATM4/8
None [1] AS/ACIF S003:2005 (2nd Edition) Customer Access Equipment for Connection to a Telecommunications Network [2] AS/ACIF S002:2001 Analogue interworking and non-interference requirements for Customer Equipment for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network 66 34 860

Market profile
Australia

Localized
Yes

Bahrain

Yes

Legacy GATM4/8 NOT [1] Bahrain PSTN Specification 25 supported (will not [2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct function) Access Arrangement Specification [3] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305X DAAS Specification [4] ETSI ETS 300 659-1 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Subscriber line protocol over the local loop for display (and related) services. Part 1: On hook data transmission. DTMF CLID NOT supported on GATI or Legacy GATM4/8 None [1] Identification of the Calling Party for SPC With DTMF, 220-250-713. [2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification. N/A 66

17

700

Brazil

Yes

34

800

CALA

No (North American based A-law) Yes Yes No (North American based A-Law) Yes

60

40

700

Canada Caribbean Global

None None None

N/A N/A N/A

60 60 60

40 40 40

700 700 700

Hong Kong

Line Reversal NOT supported on Legacy GATM4/8

[1] General Technical Characteristics 66 of Fixed Telecommunications Networks in Hong Kong, HKTA 2201, Issue 4, April 2003. [2] Network Connection Specification for Connection of Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) to Direct-Dial-In (DDI) Line of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) in Hong Kong, HKTA 2013, Issue 3, February 2003. [3] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification. [4] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305X DAAS Specification.

33

600

Installation and Maintenance Guide

270

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 67 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 2 of 3)

Differences PSTN Standards, Specifications between GATI, Referenced Pulse Dialing (ms) G4x16/G8x16, New Break Make Interdigit GATM4/8, and time time time Legacy GATM4/8
Legacy GATM4/8 NOT [1] Eircom PSTN Interface Specification, Eircom document supported (will not reference R452 NPD00, Revision: 1.1, function) 21/7/2000 [2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification. [3] ETSI ETS 300 659-1 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Subscriber line protocol over the local loop for display (and related) services. Part 1: On hook data transmission. None None [1] Mexico general Specification, June 9, 1993 66 34 1000

Market profile
Ireland

Localized
Yes

Mexico New Zealand

Yes No (UK-based telephony with Australian tones)

60

40 34

700 740

[1] PABX External Port 66 Interface Requirements PTC 107: 1989 ISSUE 1. [2] Specification PTC 200 Requirements for Connection of Customer Equipment to Analogue Lines. [3] PTC220 Requirements for Private Voice Networks connected to the PSTN/ISDN DRAFT FOR COMMENT 12 February 2003. [4] The document TNA 102: June 1996". [5] The document TNA102 Amendment to Section 10 and new Section 12.pdf. [1] TIA/EIA-716: Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Type 1 Caller Identity Equipment Performance Requirements. [2] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si3050 DAA. [3] si3050.pdf [1] Polish ASS_1_v1.doc [2] ITU-T Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU Supplement2 Series E 01/94 [1] Feature Description and Detailed Design Description documents of the existing GATI firmware [2] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs.pdf [3] si3050.pdf [4] Chapter-8-done.doc [5] PRC Fixed Telephone Network Caller Identity Delivery (YDT1277.1-2003).doc [6] PRC Ringing and Tone for Telephone Automatic Switching Network (GB3380-82).doc 60

North America

Yes

None

40

700

Poland

Yes

None

66

33

700

PRC

Yes

DTMF CLID NOT supported on GATI or Legacy GATM4/8

34

66

700

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

271

Table 67 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 3 of 3)

Differences PSTN Standards, Specifications between GATI, Referenced Pulse Dialing (ms) G4x16/G8x16, New Break Make Interdigit GATM4/8, and time time time Legacy GATM4/8
Legacy GATM4/8 not supported [1] OGSTFS Russian PSTN specs [2] si3050.pdf [3]AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs.pdf [1]S_Africa_Specs.pdf [2]ICASA TE-010.doc [3] si3050.pdf [4]AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs.pdf 60 67 60

Market profile
Russia

Localized
Yes

South Africa

Yes

Legacy GATM4/8 not supported

40

33

40

Spain

Yes

Legacy GATM4/8 not supported

[1]M1_Analogue_Trunk_Card_Spain.p 600 df [2]Public Switched Telephone Network Analogue Line interface specification Interfaz_de_telefonica_de_Espa_a-v5 _Eng.doc [3] si3050.pdf [4]AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs.pdf [1] Technical Specifications for Terminal Equipment for Connection to Public Switched Telephone Network, PSTN01, September 27, 2001 [1] BT Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN): SIN352 [2] BT Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN): SIN227 +AC7 [3] BT Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN): SIN242 [4] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si3050 DAA [5] Si3050/Si3019 Global Voice/Data Direct Access Arrangement 66

950

200

Taiwan

Yes

None

33

800

United Kingdom

Yes

None

66

34

740

Table 68 Transmission parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)

Transmission Loop length adjustment capability
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Global

PCM coding scheme

A-law A-law A-law A-law mu-law mu-law A-law

AC impedance
220 + (820 || 120 nF) 900 + 2.16 uF 600 /900 600 600 600 600

Tx CO gain (short, medium, long)

(N/A, 0, N/A) (0, 3 dB, 3 dB) (-3 dB, 0, 0) (-3 dB, 0, 0) (-3 dB, 0, 0) (-3 dB, 0, 0) (0, 3 dB, 3 dB)

Rx CO gain (short, medium, long)

(N/A, 6 dB, N/A) (3, 3 dB, 6 dB) (0, 0, 3 dB) (0, 0, 3 dB) (0, 0, 3 dB) (0, 0, 3 dB) (3 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB)

Installation and Maintenance Guide

272

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 68 Transmission parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)

Transmission Loop length adjustment capability
No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No (-3 dB, 0, 0) (N/A, 3 dB, N/A) (0, 0, 3 dB) (N/A, 3 dB, N/A)

Market profile
Hong Kong Ireland Mexico New Zealand North America Poland PRC Russia South Africa Spain Taiwan United Kingdom

PCM coding scheme

mu-law A-law A-law A-law mu-law A-law A-law A-law A-law A-law u-law A-law

AC impedance
600 270 + (750 ||150 nF) 600 320 + (1050 || 230 nF) 600 600 600 600 220 + (820 || 115 nF) 270 + (750 || 150 nF) 600 320 + (1050 || 230 nF)

Tx CO gain (short, medium, long)

(N/A, 0, N/A) (0, 3 dB, 3 dB) (0, 3 dB, 3 dB) (N/A, 3 dB, N/A) (-3 dB, 0, 0) (N/A, 3 dB, N/A) (-3 dB, 0, 0)

Rx CO gain (short, medium, long)

(N/A, 6 dB, N/A) (3 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB) (3 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB) (N/A, 3 dB, N/A) (0, 0, 3 dB) (N/A, 3 dB, N/A) (0, 0, 3 dB)

Table 69 Call supervision parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)

Call supervision Ring confirmation count (ms)
150 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 200 256 200 256 256 256 256

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong Ireland Mexico New Zealand North America Poland PRC Russia

Link/flash time (ms)

100 600 300 600 600 600 600 500 150 600 90 600 500 600 100

OSI time (ms)

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 500 100 100

Force on-hook time (ms)

1600 1600 2000 1500 1600 1600 1500 1000 2000 1600 1600 1600 1800 1600 400

Wetting time (ms)

0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 15 N/A N/A N/A 0

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

273

Table 69 Call supervision parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)

Call supervision Ring confirmation count (ms)
256 256 256 200

Market profile
South Africa Spain Taiwan United Kingdom

Link/flash time (ms)

100 120 600 90

OSI time (ms)

100 100 100 100

Force on-hook time (ms)

1600 1600 1600 1600

Wetting time (ms)

0 0 0 15

Table 70 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
On-hook caller ID DTMF (Start Digit, Stop Digit) OSI
Not supported Not supported No No

Disconnect supervision

Message waiting

Market profile
Australia Bahrain

FSK
Bellcore ETSI

Busy tone
No

Line reversal
ROI and ROA

FSK
Supported Supported

Voltage reversal
Not supported Not supported

Stutter dial tone

Not supported Not supported

Supported No (425 10% Hz, 380 10% on/ 380 10%off) Supported (425 25 Hz, 250 ms On / 250 ms Off 10%) No

Brazil

Not supported

Supported No (A,C). NOTE: Not Supported on GATI or Legacy GATM4/8 Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

CALA Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong

Bellcore Bellcore Bellcore Bellcore Bellcore

No No No No Supported (480 10 Hz and 620 10 Hz, 500 100 ms On / 500 80 ms Off)

No No No No Yes (NOT supported on Legacy GATM4/8)

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

Ireland

ETSI

Not supported

No

Supported No (425 Hz 25%, 450 ms On/ 450 ms Off 23%) Supported No (425 Hz, 250 ms On/ 250 ms Off)

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Mexico

ETSI

Not supported

No

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Installation and Maintenance Guide

274

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 70 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
On-hook caller ID DTMF (Start Digit, Stop Digit) OSI
Not supported Yes (500 ms UK Guarded Clear) Yes No

Disconnect supervision

Message waiting

Market profile
New Zealand

FSK
ETSI

Busy tone
No

Line reversal
No

FSK
Supported

Voltage reversal
Not supported

Stutter dial tone

Not supported

North America Poland

Bellcore ETSI

Not supported Not supported

No Supported in unsupervised mode (425 Hz, 500 ms On/ 500 ms Off)

No Supported in supervised mode

Supported Supported

Not supported Not supported

Not supported Not supported

PRC

Bellcore

Supported No (A/C) NOTE: Not Supported on GATI or Legacy GATM4/8 Not supported No

Supported No (450 25 Hz, 350 ms On/350 ms Off 10%)

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Russia

ETSI

Supported No (425 50 Hz, 400 ms On/400 ms Off 100ms) Supported in Supervised Mode (400 25 Hz, 500 ms On/500 ms Off 100ms) No Yes (Supported in Supervised mode)

Supported

Not Supported

Not Supported

South Africa

ETSI

Not supported

No

Supported

Not Supported

Not Supported

Spain

ETSI

Not supported

No

Yes (Supported in Supervised mode) No

Supported

Not Supported

Not Supported

Taiwan

ETSI

Supported (D, C)

No

Supported (480 + 620 Hz, 500 ms On/ 500 ms Off) No

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

United Kingdom

ETSI

Not supported

Yes (500 ms UK Guarded Clear)

No

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

GASM8 parameters
This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM. Global analog stations are not supported in the following market profiles: Brazil, CALA, Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and Taiwan. The GASM8 parameters are provided in the following tables:

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

275

Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters on page 275 Loop interface and call supervision parameters on page 276 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters on page 276 MWI, On-hook Caller Id, Disconnect Supervision on page 277

Table 71 Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters

Specifications Transmission Nominal Terminal Network PCM Input Input coding impedance Impedance scheme
220 + (820 || 120 nF) 600 600 600 600 600 220 + (820 || 120 nF) 600 600 600 600 600 A-law

Market profile
Australia

Localized
Yes

DIP switch setting

Australia

Standards used
TS 003 TCE2 N/A Refer to North America Specs Refer to North America Specs N/A N/A N/A

Bahrain Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong Ireland

No (North American Based A-Law) Yes Yes No (North American based A-law) No (North American based mu-law) No (UK-Based)

North America North America North America North America North America UK

A-law mu-law mu-law A-law mu-law A-Law

370 + 300 + (620 || 310 (1000 || nF) 220 nF) 600 600

Mexico New Zealand

No (North American based A-law)

North America

N/A N/A

A-law A-law

No (UK-based telephony UK with Australian tones) Yes North America

300 + 370 + (620 || 310 (1000 || nF) 220 nF) 600 600

North America

EIA/TIA-464A CS-03 Part I T512.1 T512.2 [1] Polish ASS_1_v1.doc 2] Technical Requirements for Private Automatic Branch Exchanges. Reference Analog interfaces11.doc

mu-law

Poland

Yes

Poland

600

600

A-law

United Kingdom

Yes

UK

BS 6450 Part 4 370 + (620 || BTNR 1080 310 nF) EN 41003 AnnexD BS 6305 BTNR 315

300 + (1000 || 220 nF)

A-law

Installation and Maintenance Guide

276

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 72 Loop interface and call supervision parameters

Loop interface Call supervision Disconn ect Min Supervi clear sion OSI duration Time (ms) (ms)
1500 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1500 1400 1500 1400 680 1500 800 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 800 850

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong Ireland Mexico New Zealand North America Poland United Kingdom

Ringing Ringing amplitu frequency de (Hz) (Vrms)

25 20 20 20 20 20 25 20 25 20 25 25 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65

Loop Current Detect Thresho ld (mA)

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

Loop current limit (mA)

32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32

Min. seize duration (ms)

200 150 150 150 150 150 200 150 200 150 180 200

Min answer duration (ms)

50 25 25 25 25 25 50 25 50 25 80 50

Min/max recall duration (ms)

30/150 250/1100 250/1100 250/1100 250/1100 250/1100 15/150 250/1100 15/150 250/1100 75/520 15/150

Table 73 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters

Dial pulse Dial pulse coding scheme
N N N N N N N N N N N N

DTMF

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong Ireland Mexico New Zealand North America Poland United Kingdom

Min/max Min/max Min interdigit DTMF coding Min DTMF break make pause scheme detect level duration (ms) duration (ms) duration (ms) (digits) (dB)
40/90 25/120 25/120 25/120 25/120 25/120 15/200 25/120 15/200 25/120 44/88 15/200 20/60 10/90 10/90 10/90 10/90 10/90 15/200 10/90 15/200 10/90 25/48 15/200 300 250 250 250 250 250 200 250 200 250 400 200 16 12 12 12 12 12 16 12 16 12 12 16 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36 -36

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

277

Table 74 MWI, On-hook Caller Id, Disconnect Supervision

MWI High Voltage (HV)
Supported 110 V Supported 120 V Supported 120 V Supported 120 V Supported 120 V Supported 120 V Not supported Supported 120 V Not supported Supported 120 V Supported 110 V Not supported

On-hook Caller Id

Disconnect Supervision

Market profile
Australia Bahrain Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong Ireland Mexico New Zealand North America Poland United Kingdom

Line Reversal (LR)

Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported Supported

Tone
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Class MWI
Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

FSK support
Yes - AUSTEL TS 030 Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore

OSI
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Busy Tone
Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

Line Reversal
Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

Yes - BT-SIN227 Supported Yes - Bellcore Supported

Yes - BT-SIN227 Supported Yes - Bellcore Yes - ETSI Supported Supported

Yes - BT-SIN227 Supported

GASI parameters
This section contains information for the onboard GASI interface. GASI interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles: Australia, Bahrain, Brazil, CALA, Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Ireland, Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, UK. Note that the GASI currently has not been localized for markets except North America. The GASI will function in some profiles outside of North America; however, the interface will respond with North American characteristics. The GASI parameters are provided in the following tables.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

278

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 75 GASI parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)

Market Profile Aspect Parameter Canada
Yes 600 600 mu-Law 20 63 10.16 26 200 10 250/1100 1400 800

Caribbean
Yes 600 600 mu-Law 20 63 10.16 26 200 10 250/1100 1400 800

Global
No (North American Based A-Law) 600 600 A-Law 20 63 10.16 26 200 10 250/1100 1400 800

Hong Kong
No (North American Based A-Law) 600 600 mu-Law 20 63 10.16 26 200 10 250/1100 1400 800

North America
Yes 600 600 mu-Law 20 63 10.16 26 200 10 250/1100 1400 800

Market Support Localized?

Transmission

Terminal Input Impedance Nominal Network Input Impedance PCM Coding Scheme

Loop Interface

Ringing Frequency (Hz) Ringing Amplitude (Vrms) Loop Current Detect Threshold (mA) Loop Current Limit (mA)

Call Supervision

Minimum Seize Duration (ms) Minimum Answer Duration (ms) Minimum/Maximum Recall Duration (ms) Minimum Clear Duration (ms) Disconnect Supervision OSI Time (ms)

Dial Pulse

Dial Pulse Coding Scheme Minimum/Maximum Break Duration (ms) Minimum/Maximum Make Duration (ms)

N 25/120 10/90

N 25/120 10/90 250 16

N 25/120 10/90 250 16

N 25/120 10/90 250 16

N 25/120 10/90 250 16

Minimum Interdigit 250 Pause Duration (ms) DTMF DTMF Coding Scheme (digits) Min DTMF Detect Level (A) (dBm) MWI HIgh Voltage (HV) Line Reversal (LR) Tone Class MWI On-hook Caller ID FSK Support 16

-27 Supported 95V Not Supported Supported Not Supported Yes - Bellcore

-27 Supported 95V

-27 Supported 95V

-27 Supported - 95V Not Supported Supported Not Supported Yes - Bellcore

-27 Supported - 95V Not Supported Supported Not Supported Yes - Bellcore

Not Supported Not Supported Supported Supported

Not Supported Not Supported Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

279

Table 75 GASI parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)

Market Profile Aspect
DIsconnect Supervision

Parameter
OSI Busy Tone Line Reversal

Canada
Supported Not Supported Not Supported Refer to North America Specs

Caribbean
Supported

Global
Supported

Hong Kong
Supported Not Supported Not Supported N/A

North America
Supported Not Supported Not Supported EIA/TIA-464A CS-03 Part I T512.1 T512.2

Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Refer to North America Specs N/A

Specifications

Standards used

ATA2 parameters
This section contains information for the ATA2 device. The ATA2 is either DR6 or DR7 mode. The mode is determined by the region in which you are located, and is not a modifiable user preference. Refer to the following tables for a list of parameters in each mode. ATA2 DR6 Market Support, Transmission, Loop Interface, Call Supervision, and Dial Pulse parameters on page 279 ATA2 DR7 Market Support, Transmission and Loop Interface parameters on page 281 ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision, Dial Pulse, and DTMF parameters on page 282

ATA2 DR6
Table 76 ATA2 DR6 Market Support, Transmission, Loop Interface, Call Supervision, and Dial Pulse parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Call Supervision Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Duration (ms) Min/ Max Recall
10/150

Dial Pulse Duration (ms) Dial Pulse Coding Scheme

N N

Market profile
Australia Bahrain

Ringing Terminal Input Frequency Localized? Impedance (Hz)

Yes 220 + (820 25 || 120 nF) 20

Min Clear
310

Min/ Max Break

20/125 20/130

Min/ Max Make

10/230 15/130

No (North 600 American Based A-Law) Yes Yes 600 600

290/1010 1500

Canada Caribbean Global

20 20 20

290/1010 1500 290/1010 1500 290/1010 1500

N N N

20/130 20/130 20/130

15/130 15/130 15/130

No (North 600 American Based A-Law) No (North American Based mu-Law) 600

Hong Kong

20

290/1010 1500

20/130

15/130

Installation and Maintenance Guide

280

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 76 ATA2 DR6 Market Support, Transmission, Loop Interface, Call Supervision, and Dial Pulse parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Call Supervision Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Duration (ms) Min/ Max Recall
10/150

Dial Pulse Duration (ms) Dial Pulse Coding Scheme

N N

Market profile
Ireland Mexico

Ringing Terminal Input Frequency Localized? Impedance (Hz)

No (UK based) 300 + (1000 25 || 220 nF) 20

Min Clear
310

Min/ Max Break

20/125 20/130

Min/ Max Make

10/230 15/130

600 No (North American Based A-Law) No (UK Based) Yes 300 + (1000 || 220 nF) 600

290/1010 1500

New Zealand

25

10/150

310

20/125

10/230

North America PRC

20 20

290/1010 1500 290/1010 1500

N N

20/130 20/130

15/130 15/130

No (North 600 American Based A-Law) No (North American Based mu-Law) Yes 600

Taiwan

20

290/1010 1500

20/130

15/130

United Kingdom

300 + (1000 || 220 nF)

25

10/150

310

20/125

10/230

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

281

ATA2 DR7
Table 77 ATA2 DR7 Market Support, Transmission and Loop Interface parameters
Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Loop Current Detect Threshold (mA)
18 18 12

Market profile
Brazil CALA Denmark

Localized?
Yes Yes Yes

Terminal PCM Input Coding Impedance Scheme

900 900 W 300 + (1000 || 220 nF) 210 + (1020 || 140 nF) 220 + (820 || 110 nF) 300 + (1000 || 220 nF) 180 + (620 || 62 nF) 120 + (840 || 110 nF) 220 + (820 || 120 nF) 220 + (820 || 120 nF) 200 + (1000 || 200 nF) 220 + (820 || 120 nF) A-Law A-Law A-Law

Ringing Ringing Frequency Amplitude (Hz) (Vrms)

25 25 25 75 75 75

Loop Current Limit (mA)

85 85 85

France

Yes

A-Law

25

75

65

Germany

Yes

A-Law

25

75

55

Holland

Yes

A-Law

25

75

12

55

Italy

Yes

A-Law

25

75

23

Norway

Yes

A-Law

25

75

12

85

Poland

Yes

A-Law

50

80

18

40

Spain

Yes

A-Law

25

75

55

Sweden

Yes

A-Law

25

75

12

30

Switzerland

Yes

A-Law

25

75

55

Installation and Maintenance Guide

282

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 78 ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision, Dial Pulse, and DTMF parameters
Call Supervision Duration (ms) Dial Pulse Duration (ms) DTMF Min DTMF Detect Level (A) (dBm0)
-25 -25 -25 -25 -25 -25 -25 -40 -25 -25 -28 -25

Market profile
Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway Poland Spain Sweden Switzerland

Min Seize
200 200 200 140 150 200 150 200 200 150 200 150

Min Answer
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

Min/Max Recall
250/1100 250/1100 80/140 220/320 80/120 90/130 80/140 80/150 25/150 80/140 30/150 80/140

Min Clear
750 750 750 225 225 750 225 750 750 225 125 225

Dial Pulse Coding Scheme

N N N N N N N N N N N+1 N

Min/ Max Break

40/90 40/90 15/200 60/75 50/70 30/70 50/70 30/70 40/90 60/75 30/70 50/70

Min/ Max Make

15/55 15/55 15/200 25/40 30/50 25/80 30/50 25/80 20/60 25/40 25/80 30/50

DTMF Min Coding Interdigit Scheme Pause (digits)

250 250 200 800 650 400 700 400 300 450 450 350 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

Voicemail
The following voicemail parameter values are the same for all countries AMIS Address Start Key: # Country Key Language Toggle: 9 Country Key Operator Revert: 0 Maximum CLID Entry: 16 Maximum Network DN Length: 16 Maximum Packet Network DN Length: 8 Broadcast Key Event: 9

See the table Voicemail parameters, by country on page 283for the remaining voicemail parameters.

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

283

Table 79 Voicemail parameters, by country (Sheet 1 of 2)

Country Login Mailbox Key
8 8 * * **

Market
Argentina Australia Austria Bahrain Brazil

Alternate QZ Mapping
YES YES YES YES YES

Enable Local Default Touch Number Language Tone Gate Length

Spanish Australian English German Arabic North American English Spanish North American English Spanish Spanish Czech Danish Finnish NO NO NO NO NO 8 8 7 6 8

Maximum CLID Display

16 8 16 16 8

National Number Length

12 9 11 6 10

Cala Caribbean

** **

YES NO

NO NO

8 7

8 7

8 10

Chile Columbia Czech Denmark Finland France Germany Global

8 8 * 8 8 8 8 8

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

NO NO NO NO NO

7 7 7 8 9 7 7 7

16 16 16 8 16 7 7 16

11 12 11 11 11 14 11 11

Euro French NO German North American English Dutch North American English United Kingdom English United Kingdom English United Kingdom English Italian United Kingdom English Spanish Australian English North American English NO NO

Holland Hong Kong

8 **

YES NO

NO NO

7 11

7 9

11 10

India

YES

NO

16

14

Indonesia

YES

NO

16

10

Ireland

YES

NO

16

10

Italy Malaysia

8 *

YES YES

NO NO

7 8

7 16

11 10

Mexico New Zealand North America

* 8 **

YES YES NO

NO NO NO

7 7 7

16 16 16

10 8 10

Installation and Maintenance Guide

284

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Table 79 Voicemail parameters, by country (Sheet 2 of 2)

Country Login Mailbox Key
8 *

Market
Norway Pakistan

Alternate QZ Mapping
YES YES

Enable Local Default Touch Number Language Tone Gate Length

Norwegian United Kingdom English Spanish Spanish Spanish Portuguese Polish Mandarin Arabic German Russian Arabic United Kingdom English United Kingdom English Korean Euro Spanish Swedish German Mandarin Thai United Kingdom English Arabic Spanish Spanish NO NO 7 7

Maximum CLID Display

16 16

National Number Length

11 12

Panama Peru Philippines Portugal Poland POC Qatar Romania Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore

8 8 * 8 * ** * 8 * * *

YES YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES YES YES

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

7 7 7 7 7 11 6 7 7 7 8

16 16 16 16 16 9 16 16 16 16 16

7 9 11 9 11 10 6 8 12 8 8

South Africa *

YES

NO

16

12

South Korea * Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand UK 8 8 8 ** * 8

YES YES YES YES NO YES YES

NO NO NO NO NO NO YES

7 7 8 7 7 7 11

16 7 8 7 7 16 9

10 11 11 11 12 10 11

United Arab Emirate Uruguay Venezuela

* 8 8

YES YES YES

NO NO NO

6 6 7

16 16 16

8 10 9

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

285

ISDN line services

The table ISDN line services on page 285 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by BCM50. The table ISDN services by Protocol on page 285 shows the network-based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each.
Table 80 ISDN line services
MCDN over PRI (SL-1) Basic Call DDI Name display Number display Centralized voice mail Camp-on ISDN Call Connection Limit Network Call Transfer Break-in Trunk Route Optimization (TRO) Trunk Anti-Tromboning DPNSS Basic Call DDI Diversion Redirection Centralized voice mail Call Offer Loop avoidance Executive Intrusion Three Party Route Optimization DASS2 Basic Call DDI Originating line identity (OLI) Terminating Line Identity (TLI) Call Charge Indication (CCI) Call Charge Rate Indication (CCRD) ETSI QSIG Basic Call DDI Name display Number display

Table 81 ISDN services by Protocol

Protocol NI Market profile Caribbean North America Available ISDN services Basic Call DID Name display Basic Call DDI sub addressing (on S-loop) ETSI Call Diversion (partial rerouting) Number display ONN blocking AOC-E (specific changes for Holland and Italy) MCID CLIP COLP CLIR COLP CLIR

ETSI Euro

Australia CALA Denmark Germany Global Holland Hong Kong

Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Taiwan

HKTA2015

Basic Call DDI CLIP

Analog and digital trunk types

The table Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions on page 286 describes the types of analog and digital trunks.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

286

Appendix N Market profile attributes

Some of these trunk types are available only when you select specific market profiles.
Table 82 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)
Trunk Types
Digital Carrier Types: T1/E1 Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1.544 Mbps (North American); 30 channels at 2048 Mbps (Europe) Loop, E&M, DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines. You can program autoanswer T1 loop start, T1 E&M trunks, T1 DID, T1 ground start trunks, PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass (calling directly to a department or individual) and line concentration (one trunk can map onto several target lines).

Description

T1 Digital Trunk Types: DID Loop This is a type of T1 trunk line used by an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM50. This is a type of T1 line. Use this type of line on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks. These trunks provide remote access to the Business Communications Manager from the public network. This trunk must have disconnect supervision so you can set the trunk to autoanswer, which provides the remote access portal. T1-groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks, but use these lines when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks. Ground start trunks work with T1 only. By configuring lines as ground start, the system recognizes when a call is released at the far end. T1 and E&M. Use this type of trunk line to create simple network connections to other phone systems. This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode. ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1.544 Mbps. These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are autoanswer trunks.

Ground

E&M PRI E1 Digital Trunk Types: DASS2 DPNSS

(British) Trunk provides multiline IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network. You can use a digital private network signaling system to tie together phone systems from various manufacturers over E1 lines, offering significant enhancements to BCM50 networking capabilities. DPNSS makes it easy to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls. The routing capabilities provide more larger-network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system, reconfiguring all the nodes or incurring extensive downtime. Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent after you program the DPNSS into the system. DPNSS uses a local node, acting as a terminating node, to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines. For example, you can link corporate offices separated geographically over DPNSS lines to other BCM50 systems, bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they are connected. BCM50 systems can function like a private network using DPNSS. Provides MFC-R2 (Multi-Frequency Compelled R2) signaling over an E1 trunk. ISDN interface with 30 B channels and 1 D channel at 1.544 Mbps. These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are autoanswer trunks.

R2MFC PRI Other Trunk Types: BRI

The BRI loop supports both trunk (T-loop) and terminal equipment (S-loop) configurations. BRI provides two bearer B-channels operating at 64 kbits/s and a data D-channel that operates at 16 kbits/s. BRI uses the D-channel to carry call information. When configured as a trunk (T-loop), the BRI loop supports the following protocol variants: NI-2: Connects to the networks S-reference point and uses regular line pools. These trunks can be manual answer or auto-answer. ETSI Euro: There are two types of connections: The S-T type connects to the networks S reference point and uses regular line pools. These trunks can be manual answer or auto-answer. The T-T type connects to the networks T reference point and uses the Bloc pool type. These trunks are auto-answer. ETSI QSIG: Connects to the networks T reference point and uses the Bloc pool type. These trunks are auto-answer.

NN40020-302

Appendix N Market profile attributes

287

Table 82 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)

Trunk Types
IP Analog Trunk Types: Loop start ADID Standard PSTN telephone line. An analog trunk that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM system. This type of trunk provides one way (incoming only) call service.

Description
Provides H.323 and SIP trunking between BCM and PBX nodes.

Installation and Maintenance Guide

288

Appendix N Market profile attributes

NN40020-302

289

Index
Numerics
4x16 default DNs 230 default line numbers 230 hardware description 48, 49 wiring chart 229, 233

B
BCM50 ASM (analog station module) 49 DSM 16 and DSM 32 (digital station module) 48 DTM (digital trunk module) 45 field replaceable units 59 installation prerequisites 77 installing 73 BCM50a 64 BCM50e 65 BRI line types 285 BRI (onboard) default line numbers 212 LED 66 BRIM default line numbers 222 wiring chart 221

A
accessories ATA2 119 ADID description 47 setting dip switches 97 ADID4 default line numbers 223 wiring chart 223 ADID8 wiring chart 223 American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, Music on Hold licence 24 amphenol connector 48, 49 analog equipment, ATA2 119 analog port termination 125 analog station media bay module, ASM 8 49 analog station modules 48 analog telephone ASM 8 and ASM 8+ modules 49 analog terminal adapter 2, see ATA2 ASM default DN 241 hardware description 49 wiring chart 241 ATA2 data communication 122 data transmission requirements 122 insertion loss measurement 124 installing 119 maximum loss 124 mounting on wall 123 overview power source 123 troubleshooting 168 auxiliary ringer wiring 208

C
caller ID internal lines 47, 48 CAP SAPS cable 60 configuration 155 Element Manager 137 overview 128 Telset Admin 131 conventions, guide 31 copyright 2 copyright, music source 24

D
data devices, using ATA 2 122 data transmission requirements, ATA2 122 dedicated cable 60 default gateway LAN DHCP scope 143 DHCP BCM50 main unit 69 DHCP server BCM50a, BCM50e 70 configuration 69

Installation and Maintenance Guide

290

Index

digital lines, 4x16 47, 48 digital station media bay module 47 digital telephone 4x16 module 48, 49 DSM 16 and DSM 32 modules 48 DTM module 45 digital trunk module DTM 45 digitizing analog equipment, ATA2 119 dip switches 98 DNs default on 4x16 230 default on ASM 241 default on DSM16 237 default on DSM32 237 default on main unit 207 default on telephony connector 207 DSM 4x16 combination module 48, 49 hardware overview 48 DSM16 default DNs 237 wiring chart 237 DSM32 default DNs 237 wiring chart 237 DTM default line numbers 219 description 45 wiring chart 219

external equipment, safety warning 42, 58 external line isolation units (LIU), MSC jacks 42, 58 external paging amplifier 58

F
FCC registration 25 RF interference 25

G
G4x16 connecting lines 112 setting dip switches 98 wiring chart 233 G4x16, G8x16 49 G8x16 connecting lines 112 setting dip switches 98 wiring chart 233 GASM dip switches 98 GATM default line numbers 233 dip switches 99 GATM4 connecting lines 112 default line numbers 225 wiring chart 225 GATM8 connecting lines 112 default line numbers 226 wiring chart 225

E
E1, DTM modules 45 electrical requirements 77 Element Manager basic parameters 137 emergency telephone installing 120 environment standards and specifications 26 environmental requirements 77 ETSI specifications 26 expansion port wiring chart 217 expansion unit 42 installing 95 replacing 187 wiring chart 217

H
handset standards and specifications 26 hard disk replacing 197 hardware overview 37 how to get help, support 34

I
Industry Canada registration 25 initial installation 155 insertion loss 125

NN40020-302

Index

291

insertion loss measurement 124 install ATA2 119 emergency telephone 120 on table or shelf 91 installing telephones and peripherals 119 ISDN line services, by region 285

BRI and PRI line types 285

M
main unit 37 BCM50 37 BCM50a 38 BCM50b 38 BCM50ba 38 BCM50be 38 BCM50e 38 default DNs 207 default line numbers 207 installing 81 installing desktop 91 installing equipment rack 82 installing wallmount 86 standard series 37 wiring chart 213, 215, 217 maximum loss, ATA2 124 MBM 42 configuring 156 default DNs 230, 241 default line numbers 219, 222, 226, 230, 233 installing 100 overview 44 replacing 183 switches 96 wiring chart 219, 221, 225, 229, 233, 237, 241 media bay modules availability by regions 243 music on hold copyright 24 music source permission 24 wiring on telephony connector 208

J
jack external paging 58 page relay 58

L
LAN cabling 159 LAN port wiring chart 213 lease time LAN DHCP scope 143, 144 LED ADSL router 64 BRI onboard, BCM50b, BCM50ba, BCM50be 66 BRIM 68 DTM 67 ethernet router 65 expansion unit 66 LAN ports 63 MBM 66 overview 61 system status 61 licence, music on hold 24 Line numbers default on BRI (onboard) 212 default on BRIM 222 line numbers default on 4x16 230 default on ADID4 223 default on DTM 219 default on GATM 233 default on GATM4 225 default on GATM8 226 default on main unit 207 default on telephony connector 207 line services ISDN support, by region 285 lines

N
network equipment registration 25 networking WAN card 59 Nortel distributor 35 North American components 48

O
output jack 58

P
page output wiring 208

Installation and Maintenance Guide

292

Index

page relay wiring 208 page, external paging amplifier 58 paging 58 external output jack description 58 relay jack description 58 patch panel 85 peripherals ATA2 119 power supply replacing 175 PRI DTM module 45 line types 285

LAN DHCP scope 143, 144 specifications system standards 26 startup profile 149 basic parameters 149 station auxiliary power supply, see SAPS station media bay module 4x16 combination module 48, 49 ASM 8 and ASM 8+ modules 49 DSM 16 and DSM 32 48 support 35 express routing code 35 how to get help 34 Nortel reseller 35 Nortel Solutions Center 34 Nortel Web site 34 Switches, setting MBM 96 symbols 31 system defaults, by region 253

R
radio-frequency interference 25 regions ISDN line services support 285 modules 243 system defaults 253 regulatory information 2 related publications 33 relay jack external paging 58 repair authorization 25 replacing components 173 expansion unit 187 hard disk 197 MBM 183 power supply 175 router card 199 reset factory settings 169 level 1 and 2 169 RF interference 25 RJ11 jacks 48 router WAN port wiring chart 215 router card replacing 199

T
T1 DTM module 45 network interface card 59 telephones ATA2 119 emergency 120 telephony connector default DNs 207 default line numbers 207 Telset Admin basic parameters 131 termination, analog port 125 testing expansion unit 166 main unit 165 MBM 167 trademarks 2 trunk modules DTM 45

W
WAN media services card 59 WAN cabling 159 WAN port wiring chart 215 WINS server

S
safety extra low voltage (SELV) external equipment 42, 58 scope status

NN40020-302

Index

293

LAN DHCP scope 143 wire color 207, 225, 226, 230, 233, 235, 237, 241 wiring chart 4x16 229, 233 ADID4 223 ADID8 223 ASM 241 BRIM 221 DSM16 237 DSM32 237 DTM 219 expansion port 217 expansion unit 217 GATM4 225 GATM8 225 LAN port 213 main unit 215, 217 WAN port 215 wiring field card (WFC) 90 wiring requirements 78

Installation and Maintenance Guide